Home

ACS550-01/U1 Drive User`s Manual

1. 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AI External speed reference 1 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC gt 5 Al2 External torque reference 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA lt D 8 JAO2 Output current 0 20 mA UJJ9 AGND Analog output circuit common 110 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 111 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DH Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses direction 15 Dl3 Speed torgue control Activation selects torgue control 16 DI4 Constant speed 1 1202 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A m Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 23 RO2A Default operation baa OMO 24 RO B Ba Running 2277 connected to 24 Baa direcnonin 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Reverses torque direction in 26 RO3A m Default operation torque control 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected
2. Drive Fault Code DRIVECOM IANG NON 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 Al1 LOSS 8110h 8 Al2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT TEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh Fieldbus Adapter 190 Drive Fault Code Fieldbus Fault Code DRIVECOM specification 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFCREFNG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2
3. a cog pod ca SS Power Output to Motor U2 V2 W2 Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screws F1 and F2 See Floating Networks on page 224 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 17 Control Terminals Table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive X1 Hardware Description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 Alt Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 KQ 2 gt J1 Al1 ON 0 20 mA R 100 Q 7 o gt AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 2 max 10 mA 1kQ lt R lt 10kQ
4. 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI2 See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated O Hard O N Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 o 9 9 9 ol ol o olol olol 8 2 13 D13 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 iNV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 iNV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE e Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1
5. ACS550 x1 059A 4 ACS550 x1 072A 4 ACS550 x1 03A3 4 R1 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS550 x1 04A1 4 ACS400 1IF 11 3 ACS400 IF11 3 ACS550 x1 06A9 4 ACS550 x1 08A8 4 ACS550 x1 012A 4 ACS550 x1 015A 4 R2 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS550 x1 023A 4 ACS400 IF21 3 ACS400 IF21 3 ACS550 x1 031A 4 R3 10m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS550 x1 038A 4 ACS400 IF31 3 ACS400 IF31 3 ACS550 x1 044A 4 R4 10m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS400 1F41 3 ACS400 1F41 3 Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network Technical Data 232 ACS550 User s Manual Brake Components Availability Braking availability for ACS550 drives by frame size is R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the Braking Resistors Frame Sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value Rmin defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque
6. 228 motor connection lugs I AA APA 225 terminal size 225 TONGUE ana a Ka KGG ve AN kite 225 motor control control mode parameter 65 IR compensation parameters 101 parameter group 101 motor potentiometer macro 46 motor temperature alarm limit parameter 115 data parameter 69 fault limit parameter 115 measure parameter group 114 overtemperature fault code 203 sensor selection parameter 115 sensor type parameter 115 thermal protection fault parameter 104 thermal time fault parameter 104 motor auxiliary aux start delay PFC parameter 138 aux stop delay PFC parameter 138 number of aux parameter 139 mounting dimensions 241 MWh counter data parameter 69 N NEMA ratings see ratings noise random sw freq parameter 102 NP Naa an aera tren aul DA ANG zel 18 O offset PID parameter 129 ok messages count parameter 133 Index 254 operating data parameter group 67 OPEX link fault code 204 OPEX power fault code 204 options parameter group 148 output frequency data parameter
7. Embedded Fieldbus 176 State Diagram ABB Drives Profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive ACS550 User s Manual e First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above e When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below e Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 bit 15 bit 0 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follow
8. eons MINIM M PEFP Speed 2001 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 e A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range 0 Time e See figure gt P 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is gt 0 Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 P 2001 0 gt Time P 2001 P 2002 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off e Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torgue by increasing output freguency O DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Warning If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on e If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit e When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus ch
9. 37 cooling AIL TOW s naaa NAAN 238 fan maintenance triggers 103 heatloss 238 space reguirement 238 correction source PID parameter 130 cover TeMOVE ina ipak NAGANA a ie meee tpt 11 rea a2 25 iN ja Ee ta Seok 24 CRC errors count parameter 133 critical speeds avoiding high parameters 100 low parameters 100 parameter group 100 select parametet 100 CSA marking noaua cee eee eee 246 O Tiek MAKKING acts nak adele dae Ga dla MANGA 246 ACS550 User s Manual current at fault history parameter 72 data parameter 67 max limit parameter 90 measurement fault code 204 rating COde ses naa Khan nG AA an KA 9 D dc brake time parameter 94 dc bus voltage data parameter 67 dc current ref parameter 94 DC magnetizing time parameter 93 DC overvoltage fault code 202 DC undervoltage fault code 203 deceleration at aux start PFC parameter 147 emergency time parameter 95 parameter group 95 ramp select parameter 95 ramp shape parameter 95 ramp time PFC parameter 147 ramp ze
10. 210 enable display parameter 89 Ae ARA AA AA 208 words data parameters 71 alternate macro 45 altitude erating sesa as ma pra NAG Aa 219 environment limit 244 shipping limit 244 analog cable reguirements 237 analog l O connections 17 specifications 17 ACS550 User s Manual analog input data parameter 67 fault limit parameters 106 filter parametets 81 less than min auto reset parameter 108 less than min fault parameter 104 loss fault codes 203 maximum parameters 81 minimum parameters 81 parameter group 81 ref correction formula 76 analog output content max parameters 85 content min parameters 85 current max parameters 85 current min parameters 85 data content parameters 85 data parameter 68 filter parameters nananana 85 parameter group 85 application block output data parameter 67 application macro parameter 65 application macros see macros Assistant control panel see control panel
11. 109 supply phase fault code 204 switching frequency 227 erating osi se ec paa NN A TE NA 219 switching frequency control parameter 102 switching frequency parameter 101 symmetrically grounded network 224 system controls parameter group 86 T temperature derating 219 terminals control description 17 control specifications 237 location diagram R1 R4 15 location diagram R5 R6 16 termination 151 test date parameter 111 thermal fail fault code 204 timed mode parameter 80 timer functions autochange parameter 147 booster parameter 118 enable parameter 117 parameter group 116 source parameter 118 speed control 80 start time parameter 117 stop time parameter 117 LOOMS AA NAA AA NA A O OE EO 9 torque at fault history parameter 72 boost current parameter 94 data parameter 67 max limit select parameter 91 max limit parameter 92 min limit select parameter 91 min limit param
12. 91 torque select parameter 91 modbus EFB addressing convention 162 ERB COS 0 5 cath wes mana kana vice 162 EFB discrete inputs 164 EFB holding registers 165 EFB input registets 165 EFB mapping details 162 EFB mapping summary 162 EFB supported features 161 EFB technical data 161 253 motor changing rotation 25 characteristics first start 66 characteristics id run 66 checking insulation 18 compatibilitY nana ze ae Panga ieee etal ts 9 connection specifications 227 id run parameter 66 load curve break point freguency 105 load curve max fault parameter 105 load curve zero speed load 105 maintenance triggers 103 nominal current parameter 65 nominal frequency parameter 65 nominal power parameter 66 nominal speed parameter 66 nominal voltage parameter 65 phase fault code 205 requirements 9 stall fault code 203 motor cable checking insulation 18 max length 00 ccc 227 requirements 228 requirements EMC
13. 97 protection circuit required w chopper 235 disconnect device 220 enclosure standard 245 environmental 243 PT100 temperature sensor 115 Index ACS550 User s Manual PTC temperature sensor pump fan control see PFC radiation limits conducted EN 61800 3 ramp pair accel decel parameter range listing for parameters GUN AAP reference analog input corrections corrections for parameter values keypad control parameter maximum parameters minimum parameters select source parameter select parameter group speed frequency control Assistant panel reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile FBA ABB drives profile FBA generic profile reference step PFC parameters regulator by pass control parameter relative humidity environment limit shipping limit relay output activation condition parameters off delay parameters on delay parameters parameter group status data parameter relays specifications remote control remove COVET reset automatic analog input less than min pa
14. 157 Diagnostics EFB s n cS os et kb Ind be GANDA ka AA 158 Modbus Protocol Technical Data 161 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data 169 Fieldbus Adapter Overview 64 snk sehen dred pp Na mr ALE ated he ril si ba hal DNA NG PAYAG 181 PISNI se ae Da BRO late ns AA Re aa UD GE NAA aka ad 183 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA 184 Communication Set up FBA 185 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA 185 Feedback from the Drive FBA L L 188 Diagnostics FBA socs varne ro LANCE ELENA PAANAN 189 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data 191 Generic Profile Technical Data 199 Diagnostics Diagnostic Displays zu naaa KAU ote eared ow a ee NGANGA ee OSG Sark 201 Gorr cting Faults c zs mili s Wieck ao AA APR 202 Correcting Alar MS 4 20 aaa sawed Beales odes 4 dal Nadia 207 Table of Contents ACS550 User s Manual Maintenance Maintenance Intervals ana ANA NAP KANG NG Dee KA 212 Heatsink maa GA va attend wag Kee Va e LAND Ra eek ed Bae ee Pee ee betes 212 Main Fan Replacement nanunua tick cepa KAN Ve Ae eee ee eae SY 213 Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement 214 OP ACIONS os 2s 2 wade cena Aa at a rach Bae ane ead wee mare Beer e 214 Control
15. 16 flux braking parameter 101 flux optimization parameter 101 force trip fault code 205 frame errors count parameter 133 frame Sie zi REDE ka SIGA NARE S ma 216 Index 252 free fall stress testing frequency at fault history parameter max limit parameter min limit parameter motor resolution motor specification switching parameter fuses 208 240 volt drives 380 480 volt drives 500 600 volt drives gain PID parameter generic profile actual value mapping actual value scaling ovetview reference scaling technical data QIANG tise trenni crak AA ee arate ground cable wire requirements fault protection hand auto macro NE ALIOSS theirs aa ia Sy ed NANG I O settings Assistant panel id run calibration description id run fail fault code IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network see floating network information parameter group input power cable wire requirements disconnect device specifications input power connection floating ne
16. e See above Al1 JOYST description Start Up 76 ACS550 User s Manual 5 DIJU 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored e When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 coMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 comM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the
17. Embedded Fieldbus 174 ACS550 User s Manual DCU Profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 JAT SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 F
18. NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation 24 ACS550 User s Manual Re install Cover IP 21 UL Type 1 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 Re install the control panel IP2009 IP 54 UL Type 12 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover 3 R1 R4 Slide the hood down over the top of the cover 4 R1 R4 Install the two screws that attach the hood 5 Install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP 54 UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window Installation ACS550 User s Manual 25 Apply Power A Always re install the front cover before turning power on Warning The ACS550 will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Apply input power When power is applied to the ACS550 the green LED comes on Note Before increasing motor speed check that the motor is running in the desired direction Start Up The ACS550 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations However review the following situations Perform the associated procedur
19. The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display Contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN as appropriate Output Mode Use the Output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the Output mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 29 Status Information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive e LOC indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel e REM indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e 22 indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control Panel Display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or counter Drive is running and at setpoint clockwise e Shaft direction is forward or reverse 1 Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using parameter Group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display Up to three parameter values By default the display shows three parameters The particular parameters depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
20. 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event zli EN 1405 e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC RO 1 OFF DELAY e eer a nee Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 Relay status e On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1404 ON DELAY 1402 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 ON DELAY Start Up 84 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418
21. 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 Current Uses current for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 0 current e Max ACT1 2 x nominal current 4 Torgue Uses torgue for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT1 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT1 2 x nominal power e Max ACT1 2 x nominal power 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 Current Uses current for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 0 current e Max ACT2 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal torque e Max ACT2 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT2 scaled so e Min ACT2 2 x nominal power e Max ACT2 2 x nominal power 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Used with analog input min max settings e g 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 e Scales analog inputs used as actual values e See figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM Sets the m
22. Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten Power motor cables and clamps not shown in figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail X0006 clamp s Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and i analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive 14 end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 11 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2003 Installation 20 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP 21 UL Type 1 Enclosure with Conduit 1 3 Install conduit gland box 6 Strip wires 10 11 12 13 Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See Conduit Gland Kit above Connect conduit runs to box Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals IP2004 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 225 Route the control cable through the conduit must be PAGA separate from input power and motor conduit runs Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copp
23. 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication Profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface and is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping Summary above The following sections describe in detai
24. 95 stop devices 222 stop select parameter 94 EN 61800 3 first environment restricted distribution radiation limits 230 unrestricted distribution radiation limits 231 enclosure pe Si iji ate pe ve est ea asia tance V 243 enclosure protection class code 9 encoder data parametets 69 encoder parameter group 131 environment first definitton 247 second definition 247 error value inversion PID parameter 122 exception codes EFB modbus 168 external comm module parameter group 132 external commands selection parameter 73 external control selection parameter 75 251 external fault automatic reset parameter 108 fault codes 203 parameters 104 external reference data parameter 67 F fan maintenance 213 fault CODES tes dundee Gioia shy Tana TE 202 COMM FBA sce ice pees a Rie aie be ae 188 comm failure EFB 156 current at history parameter 72 digital input status at history parameter 72 frequency at history parameter 72 functions parameter group 104 MAO sedi kakaawa be je a Mavens lar de a 207 history parameter group 72 last history parameter
25. POSITION RESET Resets the encoder s position feedback This parameter is self clearing 0 DISABLE Inactive 1 ENABLE Resets the encoder position feedback Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 5010 ENABLE Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS 5010 DISABLE Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE Start Up 132 ACS550 User s Manual Group 51 Ext Comm Module This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module O NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANOPEN 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 5102 5126 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings e After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y m
26. RDY ON RDY RUN READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT o of of of oj No fault OFF_2_STA e OFF2 INACTIVE o OFF2 ACTIVE OFF 3 STA e OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE LO ao SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 10 REMOTE ABOVE LIMIT Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EX11 selected 12 15 13 EXT RUN ENABLE Unused External Run Enable signal received O lt a Oo No External Run Enable signal received
27. RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 85 Group 15 Analog Outputs This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be Any parameter of the Operating Data group Group 01 Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current e Scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output e Filtered Code Description 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type P1100 Output lt 9 1 mA See Group 35 101 145 Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating Data group Group 01 e Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN AAO mA Sets the minimum content value P1505 e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1511 e Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for th
28. Start Up 128 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 ACS550 User s Manual PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 129 Group 42 External Trimming PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 4228 4229 See 4001 4021 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function e Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input enables external PID control e De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 above 7 lt DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Def
29. 72 ISG PARA roti AA AA 202 previous history parameter 72 CA AA APA AA 207 reset select parameter 86 speed at history parameter 72 status at history parameter 72 time of history parameters 72 torque at history parameter 72 voltage at history parameter 72 words data parameters 71 fault code 28 serial1etr 160 fault logging Assistant panel 33 FB actual signals parameter group 70 feedback multiplier PID parameter 124 feedback select PID parameter 124 field weakening point 227 fieldbus see comm command words data parameters 70 CPI firmware revision parameter 132 parameter refresh parameter 132 parameters 132 status words data parameters 70 status parameter 132 type parameter 132 fieldbus adapter see comm FBA firmware test date parameter 111 firmware version parameter 111 first environment definition 247 first start calibration description 66 floating network connections 224 warning about filters 230 231 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 15 warning about screws at F1 F2
30. 67 output voltage data parameter 67 output wiring fault code cee eee 205 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 108 taulit COME sa iae aaa Aa Thang 202 overspeed fault code 204 overvoltage control enable parameter 90 P panel communication parameter group 133 panel display variables parameter group 112 panel loss fault code 203 parameter analog input scale fault code 206 analog output scale fault code 206 change lock 86 descriptions 65 external relay output fault code 206 fieldbus fault code 206 hz rpm fault code 206 listing ranges resolutions defaults 53 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 190 206 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 206 PFC mode fault code 206 PFC ref neg fault code 206 restore Assistant panel 34 restore Basic panel 40 save changes 87 parameters mode Assistant panel 31 parameters mode Basic panel 39 parity RS 232 parameter 133 parity errors count parameter 133 PE earth earth fault parameter 106 PE earth connection terminal size 225 LO GUESS pa A
31. Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded Fieldbus 158 For example ACS550 User s Manual Feedback Parameter Integer Resolution Value of the Parameter that defines 10096 Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Value of 100 Ref 100 z Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm Note 1 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz Note 2 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics For general ACS550 diagnostics information see Diagnostics starting on page 201 The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 Last Fault 40401 0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 0413 Previous Fault
32. 154 modbus actual values 168 normal operation 159 overview 149 PID control setpoint source activate 156 planning iu tras a eb NG 150 ProtlES suna ao ete aka E Ma 162 reference scaling ABB drives profile 178 relay output control activate 155 SOUP nit nn ete je ei AA nalng 151 start stop control activate 153 state diagram 177 Status WOI si asian poba etn te 172 termination 151 249 comm FBA actual values 183 analog output control activate 187 comm fault response 188 configuration 185 control interface 182 control word 182 control word ABB drives 191 diagnostics 189 drive feedback 188 fieldbus control activate 185 input ref sel activate 186 installation 184 OVETVIEW e piiri y DAONG Ka eis ar te dee 181 PID control setpoint source activate 188 plannihg 183 protocol listing 181 reference ZA naa pla haa Nining 183 relay output control activate 187 SEEUP ie 2 ma KG pagk wees MANG DANG Ka Nas 185 start stop control activate 185 state d
33. DI de activated 1 DI activated 7 O O N O D Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 o ol o o o o ol o Ag pd Se Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 79 Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 for code 14 D14 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI5 DI6 and DI7 e See above D11 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMER FUNCTION 1 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when Timer Function is active See Group 36 Timer Functions 19 TIMER 1 amp 2 Selects a constant depending on the state of Timers 1 8 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 z DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DIT DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed O 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 O 0 Constant speed 3 1204
34. Every five years See Heatsink on page 212 See Main Fan Replacement on page 213 Internal enclosure cooling fan replacement IP 54 UL Type 12 units Every three years See Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement on 214 Capacitor change Frame sizes R5 and R6 Every ten years See Capacitors on page 214 Replace battery in the Assistant control panel Every ten years See Battery on page 215 The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary Remove power from drive Remove the cooling fan see section Main Fan Replacement on page 213 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Replace the cooling fan Restore power Maintenance ACS550 User s Manual 213 Main Fan Replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperat
35. Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 57 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 01 1500 rpm v U1 1800 rpm 2003 MAX CURRENT 0 1 8 long 0 1A 1 8 long v 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 Hz v 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 Hz U1 60 Hz v 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 0 7 1 6 1 0 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 0 7 1 6 1 0 2015 IMIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 0 1 300 0 2016 IMIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 IMAX TORQUE 2 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Group 21 Start Stop 2101 ISTART FUNCTION 1 5 1 1 v 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 10s 0 01 s 0 3 s 2104 DC CURR CTL 0 2 0 v 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 250 s 0 1 s Os 2108 ISTART INHIBIT 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 v 2109 EM STOP SEL 0 6 1 6 1 0 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 Group 22 Accel Decel 2201 acc DEC 1 2 SEL 0 7 1 6 1 5 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 5 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 5 s 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 O LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800
36. e Discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 lt 0 OR 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bi
37. frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive P 4023 e Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL e See figure A PID output level B PID process feedback t gt P 4024 a V 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY A B Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed freguency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive e See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above t Ng be P 4026 Setpoint 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION Stop Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint Start greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale C Parameter 4005 0 P 4025 4005 a Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Setpoint e Parameter 4005 1 P 4025 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation D e Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See figures e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 E e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 A l WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up P 4025 4026 Setpoint WAKE UP DEL
38. 2 4 4 8 38 4 57 6 76 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 8N1 1 8N2 2 8E1 3 801 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 O ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 65535 1 O IDLE 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5315 EFB PAR 15 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5316 EFB PAR 16 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5317 EFB PAR 17 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5318 EFB PAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 81 PFC Control 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 1 0 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 1 0 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 1 0 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50Hz U1 60 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 Hz U1 60 Hz 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 Hz U1 60 Hz 8112 Low FREQ 1 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 Hz U1 30 Hz 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 Hz U1 30 Hz Start Up 64 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 8114 LOw FREQ 3 0 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 Hz U1 30 Hz 8115 AUX MOT START
39. 3 The ACS550 U1 078A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACS550 U1 077A 4 discontinued in 2005 Technical Data 218 ACS550 User s Manual Ratings 500 600 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 218 Type Code Normal Use Heavy Duty Use ACS550 U1 lon Pn Pn bna Pha Pha pon see below A kW HP A kW HP Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V Note 1 02A7 6 2 7 1 5 2 2 4 11 15 R2 03A9 6 3 9 2 2 3 2 7 1 5 2 0 R2 06A1 6 6 1 4 0 5 3 9 2 2 3 0 R2 09A0 6 9 5 5 7 5 6 1 4 0 5 0 R2 011A 6 11 7 5 10 9 5 5 7 5 R2 017A 6 17 11 0 15 11 7 5 10 R2 022A 6 22 15 0 20 17 11 0 15 R3 027A 6 27 18 5 25 22 15 0 20 R3 032A 6 32 22 30 27 18 5 25 R4 041A 6 41 30 40 32 22 30 R4 052A 6 52 37 50 41 30 40 R4 062A 6 62 45 60 52 37 50 R4 077A 6 77 55 75 62 45 60 R6 099A 6 99 75 100 77 55 75 R6 125A 6 125 l0 ha 99 5 Ho O RE 144A 6 144 110 150 125 90 125 R6 1 Not available in ACS550 01 series Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 10 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pn typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 50 overload capability loha continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pha t
40. 32 767 0 not used 0 001 0 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 v 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 2 v 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 0 7 1 6 0 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 7200 rpm 0 0 120 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 s 0 1 s 60 s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 1 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 60 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 1 0 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 4101 GAIN 0 1 100 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 s 0 1s 60 s 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 10s 0 1 s Os 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 10s 0 1s 1s 4105 JERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4106 UNITS 0 31 4 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 1 0 0 4107 4109 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 1 100 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 v 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 1 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 4113 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 4114 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 O NOT USED 0 001 0 4116 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 v 4117 JACT2 INPUT 1 5 2 v 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 ACTT MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 AC
41. 6 Hz 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 600 rpm 10 Hz U1 720 rpm 12 Hz 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rom 0 1 Hz 01 900 rpm 15 Hz U1 1080 rpm 18 Hz 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1200 rpm 20 Hz U1 1440 rpm 24 Hz 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1500 rpm 25 Hz U1 1800 rpm 30 Hz 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 2400 rpm 40 Hz U1 2880 rpm 48 Hz 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 3000 rpm 50 Hz U1 3600 rpm 60 Hz 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 2 1 2 v Group 13 Analogue Inputs 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 100 0 1 0 1302 MAXIMUM Ali 0 100 0 1 100 1303 FILTER Al1 0 10s 0 1 s 0 1 s 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 100 0 1 0 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 0 100 0 1 100 1306 FILTER Al2 0 10s 0 1 s 0 1 s Start Up 56 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 14 Relay Outputs 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 45 1 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 45 1 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 45 1 3 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1408 RO 3
42. 8 8 A f 48 63 Hz us C Output U 3 0 U V LISTED ini lna 88 4769 8 RUMAA t fo 0 500 Hz er no 2030700001 Motor Py Phg 4 3 kW ACS550 01 08A8 4 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 9 Type Code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label ACS550 01 08A8 4 AC Standard Drive 550 product series Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating See Ratings chart for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 VAC Enclosure protection class No specification IP 21 UL type 1 B055 IP 54 UL type 12 Ratings and Frame Size The chart in Ratings on page 216 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the Ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code Also when using the Ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating Motor Compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor Specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this range e Type code label on drive entry for 0 2 2 0
43. DI1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs Pi e Status is displayed as a binary number e 1 indicates that the input is activated LI 0 indicates that the input is deactivated Si NG 0119 DI4 6 STATUS DI 1 DI2 DIZ Status of the three digital inputs e See parameter 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 0120 AH Relative value of analog input 1 in Start Up 68 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0121 Al2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 0122 RO1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs e 1 indicates that the relay is energized e 0 indicates that the relay is de energized gt RELAY 1 STATUS 0123 RO4 6 STATUS RELAY 2 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 RELAY 3 STATUS 0124 AO1 The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 JAO2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT The PID Controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID Controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 control
44. DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 ROTC Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A m Default operation 21 ROIB Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A x Default operation 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C f Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A n Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Two analog references Al1 2 e Analog output AO1 Speed Start stop hand auto DIH 6 e Analog output AO2 Current JI Direction hand auto DI2 5 e Relay output 1 Ready 2 Al1 0 10V e Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Running 2 p Al2 0 4 20 mA Run enable D14 e Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up 48 ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro PID Control This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow PID CTRL control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example X1 IT TSCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAH External ref 1 Manu
45. Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 lt On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e One auxiliary motor is running e ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz e Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Start Up 138 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if e The first auxiliary motor is running alone e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit f Hz 4 8112 1 e Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fax 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D P 8109 IN After the first
46. EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 135 Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Reserved 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Start Up 136 Code ACS550 User s Manual Group 81 PFC Control This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major f
47. First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 143 Code Description No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on
48. From any state OFF1 CW Bito 0 PETEM SW Bit1 0 ACTIVE n f 0 0 Power ON CW BitO 0 gt A B C D NOT READY PAPA TO SWITCH On SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO ev BE 0 INHIBITED switcH on 1 SW Bito 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CWS xxxx x1xx xxxx X111 gt BCD READY TO nal OPERATE SW PLE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 C D OPERATION mg ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A lt CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 gt RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED a CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 KEY State mm State change RFG ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING n Speed Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 195 Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE Word is a speed or frequency reference Reference Scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range asthe is Scaling Remarks REF 1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequen
49. Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 e See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE f h f eee 4007 Value Entry Display Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values 0 0003 3 e Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry e See table for example using pi 3 14159 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 123 Code Description OITO A VALUE Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 4009 100 Yo VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values P 4008 e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 l i gt dit 0 100 1000 Internal scale 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller e Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 keypad Control panel provides reference 1 Al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog inpu
50. N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORGLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Active low For the Oxxxx registers e Status is always readable e Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control e Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded Fieldbus 164 ACS550 User s Manual The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils 01 Function Code Description Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus Discrete Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs Bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose
51. Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5082 Operation is not allowed because override mode is enabled 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive models are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match 211 Diagnostics 212 Maintenance ACS550 User s Manual Warning Read Safety on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance Intervals Heatsink If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check and cleaning Main cooling fan replacement Depends on the dustiness of the environment every 6 12 months
52. SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT Supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value 5 supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 ExT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received OI No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus Adapter 194 ACS550 User s Manual The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 K CW Bit7 1 0 l 0 ad v gt gt
53. Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent i pies Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference 0122 0123 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent sy Protocol Drive Para
54. neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter such as one of the kits listed in EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables on page 229 Using an RFI filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the unit Drive s Power Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals U1 V1 W1 Frame U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE Terminal Size BRK UDC Terminals Min Wire Size Max Wire Size Torque Max Wire Size Torque mm AWG mm AWG Nm lb ft mm AWG Nm lb ft R1 0 75 18 16 6 1 3 1 16 6 1 3 1 Ra 0 75 18 16 6 1 3 1 16 6 1 3 1 R3 2 5 14 25 3 27 2 25 3 2 7 2 Ra 10 8 50 1 0 5 6 4 50 1 0 5 6 4 R5 16 6 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 95 3 0 185 350 MCM 40 30 185 350 MCM 40 30 1 Do not use aluminum cable with frame sizes R1 R4 Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size e ONE Ik A Warning For R6 power terminals if 4 1 x gi compression lugs are supplied they can only gt p f be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm 3 0 3 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive and require ring lugs as described below Ring Lu
55. o Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 o accuracy t19 E J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 KQ S p gt J1 Al2 ON 0 20 mA R 100 Q o gt 6 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 7 AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load lt 500 Q 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MO 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 2410 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the Ta ACS550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 3 2 13 DH Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 15 DIZ Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmable Default not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 RO1A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC
56. parameters in detail No Master Station on Line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct e Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network e Verify that the cable is connected and is not cut or short circuited Duplicate Stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped Wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another e The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded Fieldbus 160 ACS550 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installat
57. press EXIT RESET until the display shows status information as described below Start Up 38 ACS550 User s Manual Status Information When the Basic Control Panel is in the Output mode the display Top left shows the control location REM A LOC indicates that the drive control is local that 1 1 is from the control panel AA z EH REM indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus The center of the display provides one Group 01 parameter value at a time and makes up to three parameter values available press UP or DOWN to scroll through available parameters By default the display can scroll through three parameters The particular default display parameters depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE For example if 9904 1 the default display scrolls through parameters 0102 SPEED 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE To change the defaults use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 in the scroll list Enter value 0100 to disable any of the three items in the scroll list For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then scrolling is disabled and only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each item in the scroll list for example to convert motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 paramet
58. printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal Applicable Standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standards marks on the type code label Mark Applicable Standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C EN 60204 1 1997 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 corrigendum Sep 1998 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing An emergency stop device A supply disconnecting device EN 60529 1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code corrigendum May 1993 amendment A1 2000 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 LISTED UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment second edition G C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment Compliance is valid with the following provisions The motor and control cables
59. setup of a few basic parameters For example at the first start the drive automatically suggests entering the first task Language Select The Start up Assistant is divided into tasks You may activate the tasks one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently You are not required to use the assistant you may use instead the parameter mode to set the drive parameters Start Up 32 ACS550 User s Manual The order of the tasks presented by the Start up Assistant depends on your entries The task list in the following table is typical Task name Description Language Select Selects the language used in control panel displays Motor Set up Enters motor data and motor identification Application Selects an application macro Option Modules Activates optional modules if any mounted on the drive Speed Control EXT1 e Selects the source for the speed reference e Sets the reference limits Sets the speed or frequency limits e Sets acceleration and deceleration times e Sets up the brake chopper if activated Speed Control EXT2 e Sets the source for the speed reference e Sets the reference limits Torque Control e Selects the source for the torque reference e Sets the reference limits Sets the torque ramp up and ramp down times PID Control Selects the source for the process reference e Sets the reference limits e Sets the
60. using the default settings See Application Macros on page 42 Additional refinements can be made using the control panel to manually select and set individual parameters See Complete Parameter Descriptions on page 65 Control Panels Use a control panel to control the ACS550 to read status data and to adjust parameters The ACS550 works with either of two different control panel types Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups Basic control panel This panel described in a later section provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel Features The ACS550 Assistant Control Panel features Alphanumeric control panel with a LCD display Language selection for the display Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning Copy function Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Context sensitive help Start Up 28 Controls Display Overview ACS550 User s Manual The following table summarizes the button functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see Diagnostics Soft key 1 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower left cor
61. 01 400 V V U1 230 690 V U1 460 V U1 288 862 V 1V U1 575 V v 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 lohd 2 0 long 0 1A 1 0 long v 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 Hz v U1 60 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30 000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent v 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 2 3 0 P g 01 0 1kW 11 0 Pha v U1 0 1 HP 9910 MOTOR ID RUN 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 v Group 01 Operating Data 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm H 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 2 0 long 01A 0105 TORQUE 200 200 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 Phg 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van 1V 5 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Van 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 150 C 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz l 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 100 0 600 for torgue 0 1 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 local 1 ext1 2 ext2 1 z 0114 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h Oh 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh n 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 100 0 600 for torque 0 1 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0119 Di 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 o 0120 Jait 0 100 0 1 0121 JAl2 0 100 0 1 m 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 H 0124 laoi 0 20 mA 0 1 mA Start Up 54 ACS550 Use
62. 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 0 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 4230 TRIM MODE 0 2 1 0 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 2 1 1 PID2 REF Group 50 Encoder 5001 PULSE NR 0 16384 ppr 1 1024 v 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 1 1 0 V 5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 2 1 1 v 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 0 1 1 0 v 5011 POSITION RESET 0 1 1 0 Group 51 Ext Comm Module 5101 FBA TYPE 1 0 5102 FBA PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 done 1 refresh 1 0 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 63 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 0 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 52 Panel Communication 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s 7 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY 0 8N1 1 8N2 2 8E1 3 801 1 0 5204 JOK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 ICRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB Protocol 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 v 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2
63. 1105 Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI 1 COMM Al Yo 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 Al1 Input Signal gt 0 50 100 Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 179 ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Value Reference Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 I I I 100 a I Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 e p 096 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 26 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 r I I I 100 7 I l AH Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 P P Npa 50 100 REF2 COMMFAI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference 4 Correction Coefficient 200 I I I 100 a I AH Input Signal 0 0 50 100 Embedded Fieldbus 180 Reference Hanaling Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and ExT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters ACS550 User s Manual and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Prof
64. 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MIN in e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MAX in Hz e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque Start Up 78 ACS550 User s Manual Group 12 Constant Speeds This group defines a set of constant speeds In general e You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm e Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds e Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 CO
65. 2 A X Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA ja 21 ROIB 8 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 8 23 RO2A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A gt N Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B w 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 RO3B _4 Digital input impedance 1 5 k Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See Application Macros on page 42 Installation 18 ACS550 User s Manual Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACS550 is powered down You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24V 10 24V 111 GND 1 GND 112 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 13 DH 14 DI2 14 DI 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 16 DI4 17 DI5 17 DI5 18 DI6 18 DI6 Install the Wiring Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation A Warning Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that m
66. 2685 280 165 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 239 Air Flow 380 480 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 500 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACS550 x1 Frame Size BTU Hr m3 h ft min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 177 44 26 05A4 4 R1 73 249 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 433 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1150 88 52 031A 4 R3 457 1560 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1918 134 79 044A 4 R4 667 2276 280 165 059A 4 R4 907 3096 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3820 280 165 077A 4 R5 1295 4420 168 99 078A 4 R4 1295 4420 280 165 096A 4 R5 1440 4915 168 99 124A 4 R6 1940 6621 405 238 157A 4 R6 2310 7884 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9590 405 238 195A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 Technical Data 240 ACS550 User s Manual Air Flow 500 600 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACS550 U1 Frame Size W BTU Hr m3 h ft min 02A7 6 R2 46 157 88 52 03A9 6 R2 68 232 88 52 06A1 6 R2 124 423 88 52 09A0 6 R2 170 581 88 52 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 017A
67. 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal e You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 e Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 acT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN A1 A2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX A1 A2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 SQRT A1 A2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SQA1 SQA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 SQRT ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014 e Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference O NOT USED 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x JA1 A2 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 125 Code Description
68. 5 4 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 044A 4 44 60 JJS 60 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 077A 4 77 100 JJS 100 078A 4 77 100 JJS 100 096A 4 96 125 125 JJS 125 124A 4 124 160 175 JJS 175 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 195A 4 195 250 250 JJS 250 Technical Data 222 ACS550 User s Manual Fuses 500 600 Volt Drives ACS550 U1 Input Current Mains Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 02A7 6 2 7 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 017A 6 17 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 JJS 100 099A 6 99 125 150 JJS 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 Emergency Stop Devices The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT Generate an emergency stop of the motor e Separate the drive from dangerous potential Input Power Cables Wiring Input wiring can be any of A four conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding
69. 58 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 3609 sTOP DAY 2 T7 1 1 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 3 1 7 1 1 3613 sTOP DAY 3 TT 1 1 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 3617 sTOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 0 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3624 TMR FUNC1 4 SRC 0 31 1 0 3628 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 1 1 0 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 s 0 1 s 60 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 10s 0 1s Os 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 10s 0 1 s 1s 4005 JERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4006 UNITS 0 31 4 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 1 0 0 4007 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 1 100 4007 4010 SETPOINTSEL 3 P0 19 YON Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 61 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 1 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 4014 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768
70. 6 R2 337 1150 88 52 022A 6 R3 457 1560 134 79 027A 6 R3 562 1918 134 79 032A 6 R4 667 2276 280 165 041A 6 R4 907 3096 280 165 052A 6 R4 1120 3820 280 165 062A 6 R4 1295 4420 280 165 077A 6 R6 1504 5136 405 238 099A 6 R6 1821 6219 405 238 125A 6 R6 2442 8339 405 238 144A 6 R6 2813 9607 405 238 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 241 Dimensions and Weights The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels Then look up that type code in the Technical Data on page 216 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACS550 drives is located in the ACS550 Technical Reference manual Mounting Dimensions W1 pin See Detail A 98 d See Detail B o k Detail A Detail B X0032 IP 21 UL type 1 and IP 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 ia mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in W1 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 6 3 160 6 3 238 9 4 263 10 4 W2 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 Hi 318 125 418 164 473 18 6 578 228 588 23 2 675 26 6 55 02 55 o2 65 lo 25 6 5 0 25 65 025 9 0 0 35 10 0 0 4 10 0 04 130 0 5 13 0 0 5 140 0 55 14 0 0 55 55 o2 55 o2 8 0 los fao o3 85 los 85 03 55 02 5 5 o2 6 5 0 25 6 5 025 65 o 25 9 0 0
71. 6320h 1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFCWOSCALAR 6320h 1009 PAR PCU1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h 1014 PARPFCIO3 6320h Serial Communication Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 191 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 3 z 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGEN
72. A Speed reference Actual speed t t Lai Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller 0 OFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected e Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed e Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive e Accelerates the motor e Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation e Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values e Resets 2305 to OFF Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 99 Group 24 Torque Control This group defines variables used for torque control operation Code Description 2401 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero Start Up 100 ACS550 User s Manual Group 25 Critical Speeds This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mech
73. De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 coMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMER FUNCTION 1 Energize relay when Timer Function 1 is active See Group 36 Timer Functions 38 40 TIMER FUNCTION 2 4 Energize relay when Timer Function 2 4 is active See Timer Function 1 above 41 M TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 Maintenance Trig 42 M TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 Maintenance Trig 43 M TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 Maintenance Trig 44 M TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 Maintenance Trig 45 RESERVED Relay is not used and is de energized 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means e See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
74. EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP OUT 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FULL 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 171 ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 5319 s Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unuse
75. For example if 9904 1 the display shows parameters 0102 SPEED 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE Use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 to display Entering parameter 0100 results in no parameter displayed For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each parameter in the display for example to convert the motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc A bar graph rather than any of the parameter values Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404 3411 and 3418 Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows e Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys e Lower middle displays the current time if configured to show the time Operating the Drive LOC REM The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the remote control REM mode and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1 Start Up 30 Press MENU from the Output mode ACS550 User s Manual To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the button until first LOCAL CONTROL or later LOCAL KEEP RUN is displayed e Release the button while LOCAL CONTROL is displayed to set the pa
76. INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input e De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault e See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating O NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 WARNING When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP 3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final t temperature with steady load e For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp Rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100 je 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 J manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at si
77. In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 Panel REF1 P 1101 REF1 Panel REF 2 ia P1106 5 0 17 REF2 500 PID Setpoint U Panel REF2 500 19 Al P4016 G40 Current PID1 Torgue Power Gaga P4017 P4014 P4015 F Torque PID Act Value Power Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102 DI Oe Piio4 P1105 Al Speed Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 al P1106 Gis Const Al 4 Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 PanelREF2 p4010 PID Setpoint 0 17 P1107 ka P4012 P1108 Ra P4013 19 Comm Internal G40 Al P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torgue Power P4014 P4015 Bug P4017 PID Act Value Torque Power PANEL Hand Auto Selection HAND AUTO Note In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 121 PID Controller Advanced ACS550 has 2 separate PID Controllers e Process PID PID1 and e External PID PID2 P
78. In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x l n or 0 90 x long Altitude Derating In altitudes from 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single Phase Supply Derating For 208 240 Volt series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching Frequency Derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either e Derate Py Ppq and lop lopg to 80 or e Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 90 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either e Derate Py Phg and la long to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F and note that the
79. MAIN MEHU At this point the middle of the display is a listing of the PARAMETERS other modes and the top right text says Main menu ASSISTANTS Press UP DOWN to scroll to the desired mode CHANGED PAR Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted L EXIT ENTER The following sections describe each of the other modes Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 31 Parameters Mode Use the Parameters mode to view and edit parameter Ca PARAMETERS 1 Select PARAMETERS in the Main Menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR LEXIT ENTER 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter OC gt PE GROUPS A group then press SEL Hi OPERATING DATA id FAULT HISTORY 16 START lt STOP lt DIR 11 REFEREHCE SELECT 3 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter in a group k 162 EXTI lt EXIZ SEL EXT1 NOTE The current parameter value appears below the ee HER ane highlighted parameter EVIT EDIT 4 Press EDIT 5 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value Note To view the parameter default value In the set mode press UP DOWN simultaneously 6 Press SAVE to store the modified value or press CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled 7 Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu Start up Assistant Mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the
80. Panel oy ccc oss fe eae Bae pete eee eae eek eS baa hbase 215 Technical Data Ratings naaawa Ag Aa bine ere See ene au aden era a GIG Fale eee aes 216 Input Power Connections An en ee aie MALA Ee Rees ere tear Oe 220 Motor Connections sedes Veal ie kana la hark VE Bk AA 227 Brake Components i 20 Sen aed eh te an naa ng NA Pan ie jh Mc AN 232 Control Connections a a a RANG an KAP Dan wed 236 NOE NOVE iN A EN GG ONE EIR ONA 238 GOON 23 AA AG ARR PA PK PA ee 238 Dimensions and Weights sanag GA NG bee NGA SGN a eee ee 241 Degrees of Protection si ssd zako eae otek ka KAKA en aaa sae ee 243 Ambient CONGILONG 22 zelje za Fe ke weave apes NG ge ine Ee eds Ga ews 244 MaieridlS 30 eae oie ae Soe ee aw oe Ree haga Senet NG away kije 245 Applicable Standards s s TG ma Ma eRe oi ees ee ees AE Ee RN lea je 245 LAITY EAS th ace 3 Bie ect et BAe Aa Ma ang naa MA aaa RT Gay pa hdl Aten ond Ha nagda 247 Index Table of Contents ACS550 User s Manual Installation Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard A Warning Before you begin read Safety on page 3 Installation Flow Chart The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation o
81. Ready 2 gt Al1 0 10 V Run enable DI6 e Relay output 2 Running 2 P Al2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 47 Application macro Hand Auto This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1 2 JAH External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control KO 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC D gt 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common DH H7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA H9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DB EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18
82. Recommended Corrective Action 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus FILE 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 a The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault e Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct e Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMP The drive cannot use the software SWTYPE e Internal Fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive e Call support representative 101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the driv
83. Reference Scaling Where reguired REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate e Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus Protocol Technical Data section e Reference Scaling in the ABB Control Profiles Technical Data section Miscellaneous Drive Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control reguires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC
84. Reserved 7 STPMODE R Reserved 8 STPMODE EM Reserved 9 STPMODE C Reserved 10 RAMP 2 Reserved 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE 13 RAMP IN 0 LINK ON 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 TORGLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK Bit 0303 STS CMD WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 0 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED REQ MAINT 2 STARTED DIRLOCK 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 4 ZERO SPEED CTL MODE 5 ACCELERATE Reserved 6 DECELERATE Reserved 7 AT SETPOINT Reserved 8 LIMIT Reserved 9 SUPERVISION Reserved 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 71 0305 FAULT WORD 1 pear only copy of the Fault Word 1 When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words e See Fault Listing on page 202 for a description of the faults The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros anda 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0306 FAULT WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 e See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 See parameter 0305 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 0 OVE
85. S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 lt VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm e Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 2 VECTOR TORO Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm e Reference 2 is torque reference in 100 is nominal torque 3 SCALAR SPEED scalar control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Output voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage A Must equal the value on the motor rating plate The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the mains voltage P 9905 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 long where long is drive current Output frequency 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ P 9907 Defines the nominal motor frequency Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz e Sets the freque
86. Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant control panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function except the clock Maintenance 216 ACS550 User s Manual Technical Data Ratings By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings e NEMA ratings shaded columns e Frame size Ratings 208 240 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 218 Type Code Normal Use Heavy Duty Use a zzz i Frame ACS550 x1 lon Py Pn Dha Pha Pha Size see below A kw HP A kW HP Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 0 75 1 0 3 5 0 55 0 75 R1 06A6 2 6 6 11 1 5 4 6 0 75 1 0 R1 07A5 2 7 5 1 5 2 0 6 6 11 1 5 R1 012A 2 11 8 2 2 3 0 7 5 1 5 2 0 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 0 5 0 11 8 2 2 3 0 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 15 16 7 4 0 5 0 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 0 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 0 15 0 30 8 7 5 10 0 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 0 20 0 46 2
87. VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ e Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED 1203 1208 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Start Up 80 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timer activated constant speed mode Timer can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and4 1 EXT cs1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timer is active selects Constant speed 1 when Timer 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timers 1 and 2 are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 lExternal reference 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 cs1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when Timer 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both timers are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 81 Group 13 Analog Inputs This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog in
88. are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 Reserved 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 Reserved 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check e Digital input configuration Communication settings Diagnostics 210 ACS550 User s Manual Alarm Code Display Description 2022 START ENABLE 2 MISSING This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing e To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop activated 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong va
89. are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Safety ACS550 User s Manual 5 Table of Contents Safety Use of Warnings and Notes cece eee 4 Table of Contents Installation Installation Flow Chart L eee ee eee ee eee 7 Preparing for Installation 2 Ae ssn stot Aer SUAL nakat Bano Kana kagaanan nganga Uk aang 8 Installing the Drive 3 Hm NG BA NABA MARYA KA nah AA Pba KAL Kaj bA 11 Start Up Control Panels aap an iba NG naal ania NG ma NMNG es ANA madaan 27 Assistant Control Panel sen sedere rederier cee ee eee eee 27 Basic Control Panel cerris esra edene deara eee teens 37 Application Macros s n aeaaaee 42 Complete Parameter List for ACS550 0 0 0 c ee eee 53 Complete Parameter Descriptions 0000 eee ee eee 65 Embedded Fieldbus OVEIVIEW Naa Dan Kin ha ered aed Die Bt NG nA oak a oe O pih tal Nka lje ta 149 Planning sect Saher setts rn NANG Ha DAE OS reais NAN petini RG 150 Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB 150 Communication Set up EFB 151 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB 153 Feedback from the Drive EFB
90. auxiliary motor stops k KTE Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 A A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 ly y f e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P 8112 1 KAT INI compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor fMIN B t See figure where sd e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P8116 x e B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency C decreases 1 On i e Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note Low Frequency 1 value must be between e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 ILOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 e Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if e Three auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 e Output frequency stays belo
91. by the Motor Id Run The Control Panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel s battery Download Full Set Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives This download does not include user sets of parameters Note Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Download Application Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same Download User Set 1 Copies USER S1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive The general procedure for parameter backup operations is Select PAR BACKUP in the Main Menu 2 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired option 3 Press ENTER The parameter set is transferred as directed During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percent of completion 4 Press EXIT to step
92. by the timer O NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 P1 Time Period1 selected in the timer 2 P2 Time Period2 selected in the timer 3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 P3 Time Period3 selected in the timer 5 P3 P1 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 P3 P2 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 P4 Time Period4 selected in the timer 9 P4 P1 Time Periods 4 and 1 selected in the timer 10 P4 P2 Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 119 Code Description 11 lt P4 4 P2 4 P1 Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 12 P4 P3 Time Periods 4 and 3 selected in the timer 13 P4 P3 P1 Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 14 P4 P3 P2 Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected in the timer 15 P4 P3 P2 P1 Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER B Booster selected in the timer 17 B P1 Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 B P2 Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 B P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 B P3 Booster and Time Period3 selected in the timer 21 B P3 P1 Booster and Time Periods 3 and 1 selected in the timer 22 B P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 3 and 2
93. cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s Control Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame Size Maximum Wire Size Torgue mm AWG Nm lb ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 Technical Data 238 ACS550 User s Manual Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Cooling Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space above and below the ACS550 drive 200 mm 8 in Requirement Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACS550 units can be mounted side by side Air Flow 208 240 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 Volt drives Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACS550 x1 Frame Size W BTU Hr m3 h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06A6 2 Ri 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 Ri 81 276 44 26 012A 2 Ri 116 404 44 26 017A 2 Ri 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 373 88 52 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786
94. critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 e See parameter 2503 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Group 26 Motor Control 101 Code Description 2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION Changes the magpnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 Disables the feature 1 Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of Torque 95 Rated Motor Power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of o 1 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in 120 W O Flux Braking 2 15 kW the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kW changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 4 75 kW 0 Disables the feature 5 250 kW 1 Enables the feature 2603 IR COMP VOLT IR Compensation Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz e When enabled IR Compensation provides an extra Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR SCALAR SPEED Compensation for example in applications that reguire a Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating 4 Motor Typica
95. current is limited to a maximum value of long Or e Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical Data 220 ACS550 User s Manual Input Power Connections Warning Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Over voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input Power Specifications Input Power Mains Connection Specifications 208 220 230 240 VAC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 Voltage U 400 415 440 460 480 VAG 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 x1 xxxx 4 500 525 575 600 VAC 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 U1 xxxx 6 Prospective short Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA circuit current in a second providing that the mains cable of the drive is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power 0 98 at nominal load factor cos phi Cable Temperature 90 C 194 F rating minimum Rating Disconnect Device The ACS550 does not include a disconnect device A means to disconnect input power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACS550 This disconnect device must Be sized to conform
96. drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input e The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel e When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e Activating the digital input locks out local control e De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 COMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The Command
97. drives e What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus Adapter 184 ACS550 User s Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting Procedure Note Install the input power and motor cables first 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 7 X00301 YI AAHH 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp emman 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configura
98. e Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated e Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands e See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Start Up 74 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 11 lt TIMER FUNCTION 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer Function 1 Timer
99. exceeds the limit 3206 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 11 lt sUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 12 sUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay e See parameter 3103 delay time 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or faul
100. for ExT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated ExT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMER FUNCTION 1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer Function Timer Function activated EXT2 Timer Function de activated EXT1 See Group 36 Timer Functions 10 12 TIMER FUNCTION 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer Function See Timer Function 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 DI1 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal so
101. identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 Fault History parameters 1 Using the control panel in Parameters mode select parameter 0401 2 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic control panel 3 4 Press SAVE Press UP and Down at the same time Correcting Alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required e Use Alarm Listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Diagnostics 208 Alarm Listing ACS550 User s Manual The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each pei Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct e Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 e Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Over voltage controller is active Check for and correct e Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Under voltage controller is active Check for and correct e Undervoltage on
102. if compression lugs are supplied and can be 1 used Attach the supplied compression lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach compression lug to the drive x X60003 ACS550 User s Manual Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual Motor Connections 227 A Warning Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors A Warning Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage A Warning Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor Connection Specifications Motor Connection Specifications Voltage U gt 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Current See Ratings on page 216 Field Weakening Point 10 500 Hz Switching Frequency Selectable 1 4 8 or 12 kHz 1 4 or 8 kHz for 600 V R6 frame size that is for ACS550 U1 077A 6 ACS550 U1 144A 6 Length Cable Temperature Rating Maximum Motor Cable 90 C 194 F rating minimum Max Motor Cable Length Frame Size fsw 1 or 4
103. in days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees centigrade PTC resistance in Ohms e Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 MECH ANGLE Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero position can be set by A Z pulse input if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE e Parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE e Any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value e Increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 e Decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED When a Z pulse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid This parameter starts at zero on power up and changes to 1 only if e Parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE ENABLE and An encoder Z pulse has been detected Start Up 70 Group 03 FB Actual Signals This group monitors field
104. is not required e Four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 225 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 223 The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table IEC NEC Based on Based on e EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 e NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires e PVC insulation e 90 C 194 F wire insulation e 30 C 86 F ambient temperature e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e 70 C 158 F surface temperature e Not more than three current carrying e Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or earth Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder Clemons K side by side Copper cables with concentric copper shield toad guca Load AlCable Max Load Cu Wire Size Current mm Current mm SIH AWG kemil A A 14 3x1 5 Do not use aluminum 22 8 14 20 3x2 5 cable with frame sizes an 12 27 3x4 36 4 10 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117
105. kHz fsw 8 kHz or 12 kHz R1 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft R2 most 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft R2 600 V 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft R3 R4 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft R5 R6 300 m 980 ft 150 m 490 ft A Ground Fault Protection Warning Using a motor cable longer than specified in the chart above may cause permanent damage to the drive ACS550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic e Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature e Can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Technical Data 228 ACS550 User s Manual e Could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables Grounding and Routing Motor Cable Shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable e Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive e Armored Cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables e Shielded Cable
106. mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either e Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or e Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 1 0 COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct e Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate e Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2007 Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check e Input source and connections e Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 e Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or e Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check e Communication lines and connections e Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS e Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual 209 Alarm Teit Code Displ
107. pi Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous e For configuration information see the following Communication Set up EFB below Activate Drive Control Functions EFB on page 153 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus Protocol Technical Data on page 161 Communication Set up EFB Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL lt 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded Fieldbus 152 Serial Communication Configuration ACS550 User s Manual Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station ld may require adjustment Protocol Reference Code Description Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL the protocol sets this p
108. pre magnetizing time param 2103 has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete e Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR SPEED mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYSTART Selects the flying start mode e Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR SPEED mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only e May be necessary in drives with high starting torque e Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current e See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR SPEED mode only Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the spee
109. protection is activated the drive coasts to stop A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING A warning indication is displayed 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for underload protection 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE T This parameter provides five selectable curves CA JA shown in the figure al Underload curve types e If the load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by parameter 3014 the J 70 underload protection is activated e Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor rated 60 freguency set by parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM J FREQ 50 e Tm nominal torque of the motor 40 e fy nominal frequency of the motor J 30 20 im f 0 f T T ko fn 247 fy 3017 EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT O lt DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost O lt NOT SEL No response 1 lt FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2005 I O COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new re
110. s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent I poe Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM A11 10 comM Al1 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Reguired only if 2 references used 10 COMM Al Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where reguired REFERENCES can be scaled See the Reference Scaling in the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data e Generic Profile Technical Data System Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control reguires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 187 Relay Output Control
111. s 0 1 s 60 s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 60 s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 O LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s 2208 EM DEC TIME 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 1 0s 2209 RAMP INPUT O 0 6 1 6 1 0 Group 23 Speed Control 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 0 0 01 10 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 600 00 s 0 01 s 2 5 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms 1 ms 0 2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0 OFF 1 ON 1 O OFF Group 24 Torque Control 2401 TORQ RAMP UP 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 Group 25 Critical Speeds Start Up 58 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rom 0 Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm O0 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 Hz Group 26 Motor Control 2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 2603 IR COMP VOLT 0 100 V 1 si
112. screw removed but included in the conduit box Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks EM3 Must Be Out Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg i l2 Y L2 13 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase L1 grounded at an Variac without L1 end point solidly grounded neutral L2 ft N m L3 Ba EM3 an M4x16 screw makes an internal ground connection r L1 that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the network is symmetrically grounded EM3 may be installed For reference the diagram at right illustrates a symmetrically grounded network Floating Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For floating networks also known as IT ungrounded or impedance resistance grounded networks e Disconnect the ground connection to the internal RFI filters ACS550 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws see Power Connection Diagrams on page 15 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 225 ACS550 U1 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the EM1 screw unit is shipped with EM3 removed see Power Connection Diagrams on page 15 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see page 16 e Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to
113. source Drive terminals 28 32 are for R8485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 Q Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 151 e To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated Station Station Station Station X1 Identification Hardware Description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 B Positive 28 SCR J2 J2 SCR 29 B 30 A Negative SOTA WG A i ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON 2 R 32 Screen SCR Be BER OFF position ON position
114. speed reference limits e Sets the source and limits for the process actual value Start Stop Control e Selects either EXT1 or EXT2 e Defines the direction control e Defines the start and stop modes e Selects the use of Run Enable signal Protections Output Signals Sets the torgue and current limits Selects the signals indicated through the relay outputs RO1 RO2 RO3 and optional relay output s if installed Selects the signals indicated through the analog outputs AO1 and AO2 Sets the minimum maximum scaling and inversion values Select ASSISTANTS in the Main Menu Press UP DOWN to select START UP ASSISTANT Note Rather than the Start up Assistant you can select Assistants for individual tasks such as Output Signals Make entries or selections as appropriate Press SAVE to save settings Each individual parameter setting is valid immediately after pressing SAVE Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 33 Changed Parameters Mode Use the Changed Parameters mode to view and edit a listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro default values Procedure Select CHANGED PAR in the Main Menu The display lists all changed parameters 2 Press ENTER 3 Press UP DOWN to select a changed parameter As each parameter is highlighted the parameter value appears 4 Press EDIT to edit the parameter value 5 Press UP DOWN to select a new value edit the par
115. speed mode 65 Index 256 speed constant digital input selection parameter parameterei aa vate paha nas 79 parameter group 78 stall frequency fault parameter 105 function fault parameter 105 FEGION 2 stele seed Sot See ah k dlake vi 105 time fault parameter 105 standards 245 CE marking 246 CSA marking 246 C Tick marking 246 EEN ele O raras a mapa NG 245 EN 60204 1 pana iin eee hed eae dnd 245 EN 60529 245 EN 61800 3 245 247 IEC 60664 1 245 UBOGA kel a NGA 245 UL MAIKING wee ae idi pried eek wey 246 start aux motor PFC parameters 137 aux motor delay 138 CONTON nam BALE be eG de edd NG Gta ay AD 30 control EFB comm 153 control FBA comm 185 DC magnetizing time parameter 93 delay PFC parameter 146 freguency PFC parameters 137 function parameter 93 inhibit parameter 94 parameter group 93 select enable source parameter 88 torque boost current parameter 94 start mode automati at Maca ob bie pti LAG 93 automatic torque boost 93 DC ma
116. status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 Ca aaa d1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 Cacao ee li controlled by writing to 40136 parameter 0136 Embedded Fieldbus 156 PID Control Setpoint Source ACS550 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 9 COMM Alt AH 4110 SET POINT SEL 10 COMM A11 Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set
117. the maximum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Sets the second minimum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Start Up 92 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 93 Group 21 Start Stop This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode e Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR SPEED mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note Mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set
118. time parameter 106 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 132 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 132 fieldbus parameters 132 fieldbus status parameter 132 fieldbus type parameter 132 protocol select parameter 148 relay output word data parameter 68 values data parameter 68 comm EFB actual value scaling 157 actual values 157 analog output control activate 155 comm fault response 156 configuration 152 configure for loss of communication 159 control interface 149 control word 169 diagnostics 158 drive control of functions activate 153 exception codes 168 fault Code 28 naaa sie zrna bot na 160 fault code 31 160 fault code 32 160 fault code 33 160 fault tracing parameters 158 fault duplicate stations 159 fault intermittent off line 160 fault no master station on line 159 fault swapped wires 159 feedback from drive 157 input ref sel activate 154 installation 150 misc drive control activate
119. to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current J1 o gt Al1 0 10 V e Speed torque control DI3 e Relay output 1 Ready z Constant speed selection DI4 Relay output 2 Running 2 P Al2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 3 Fault 1 Run enable DI6 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Macro Default Values for Parameters 51 Parameter default values are listed in Complete Parameter List for ACS550 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz IEC compliance ACS550 01 and 60 Hz NEMA compliance ACS550 U1 ACS550 01 E o 2 5 2 vo Le O 5 c pes Parameter m 3 E E Se S 8 52 SE S 25 5 ao o R8 D lt I irs o a a a 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2
120. too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback e Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either e Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR e Parameters in Group 10 Command Inputs and Group 11 Reference Select if drive operation is REM 11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct e Motor connections e Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Diagnostics 204 ACS550 User s Manual Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Acti
121. type parameter 115 sensorless vector control mode 65 serial 1 error fault code 28 160 serial 1 error fault code 205 serial communication see comm serial number 8 setpoint maximum PID parameter 124 setpoint minimum PID parameter 124 setpoint select PID parameter 123 shock stress testing 244 short circuit fault code 203 single phase supply connection eee eee 13 datang ees Sant be PG HE 219 sleep selection PID parameter 126 slip compensation ratio parameter 102 SOM KEY dyed rset a aNG eee ed gh wd ve Vari 28 soft keys control panel 28 specifications control connections 236 input power 220 MAINS tai nna a EN NU Ee a ga 220 motor connections 227 speed at fault history parameter 72 data parameter 67 max limit parameter 90 min limit parameter 90 speed control acceleration compensation parameter 98 automatic tuning parameter 97 98 derivation time parameter 97 integration time parameter 97 parameter group 97 proportional gain parameter 97 vector
122. 00 C or PTC ohms See parameters 1501 and 1507 O lt NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor e Analog output A01 or A02 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 or Al2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 2x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors Ohm Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4000 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses PTC The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor e The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tres as does 550 the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it into ohms e The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 100 the motor operating temperature 1330 Temperature Resistance Normal 0 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4 kohm 5 THERMISTOR 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor e Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital i
123. 1 Relay Outputs J2 DIP Switch Optional Module 1 for RS485 Termination J2 J2 Ij X1 Communications Po A i o i RS485 a z HEL e ON i s il UA a i Optional Module 2 off position on position 7 B i Power Input i am i Power Output to Motor ji 2 V2 W2 Frame Sizes U1 V1 W1 pa OO OD Od SO OO a U 3 R5 R6 differ See EM3 next page EM1 GND X0003 Optional braking Frame Terminal Brake Options Size Labels R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor R3 R4 UDC UDC e Braking unit Chopper and resistor A Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing On ACS550 01 screws EM1 and EM3 On ACS550 U1 screw EM1 drive is shipped with EM3 already removed See Floating Networks on page 224 Installation 16 ACS550 User s Manual The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 Ji Power Input U1 V1 W1 Optional braking Frame Terminal Size Labels ia ir LULU H OI zi are JE alse Power Output to Motor U2 V2 W2 Brake Options R5 R6 UDC UDC e Braking unit e Chopper and resistor Power Input U1 V1 W1 F2 F1
124. 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 155 Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit O or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036 Note 1 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 COMM Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 Note 1 by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 Note 1 by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3
125. 1 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 2008 DERIVATION TIME Error A Process Error Value Defines the PID Controller s derivation time e You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output e The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative part of the PID controller output mt 0 1 10 0 Derivation time seconds PID output A D part of controller output I Gain_ P 401 t ra P 4003 gt 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output e Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter e Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed O NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fok 1 YES
126. 109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency e Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled e Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR O NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 147 Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off e Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel applies 0 NOT SEL AUX 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value Motor entered as the acceleration time 1 UE i o oi 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 freguency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp parameters 2202 or 2205 e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary B speed regulated motor decelerating using Gr
127. 11 0 15 0 R3 075A 2 74 8 18 5 25 0 59 4 15 0 20 0 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 0 30 0 74 8 18 5 25 0 R4 114A 2 114 30 0 40 0 88 0 22 0 30 0 R4 143A 2 143 37 0 50 0 114 30 0 40 0 R6 l 178A 2 h78 4 amp 0 leoo t50 37 0 500 R6 221A 2 221 55 0 75 0 178 45 0 60 0 R6 248A 2 248 75 0 100 192 55 0 75 0 R6 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 217 Ratings 380 480 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 218 Type Code Normal Use Heavy Duty Use ACS550 x1 lon Pr Pr bna Pha Pha pg see below A kW HP A kW HP Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1 5 2 4 0 75 1 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 05A4 4 5 4 2 2 Note 1 4 1 1 5 Note 1 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 5 4 2 2 2 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 6 9 3 3 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 8 8 4 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 11 9 5 5 7 5 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 15 4 7 5 10 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 31 15 20 R3 044A 4 44 22 30 38 18 5 25 R4 059A 4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4 077A 4 Note 3 77 Note 2 60 65 Note 2 50 R5 078A 4 Note 3 77 Note 2 60 65 Note 2 50 R4 096A 4 96 45 75 77 37 60 R5 124A 4 124 55 100 96 45 75 R6 157A 4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6 195A 4 195 110 Note 1 162 90 Note 1 R6 1 Not available in ACS550 U1 series 2 Not available in ACS550 01 series
128. 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 AO1 CONTENT 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 1507 AO2 CONTENT 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM A02 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Start Up 52 ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 U1 o pe 5 g E vs Parameter m 3 5 E Se 3 S 8 SE Ela SE 5 e e RS 2 a 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
129. 2 40403 Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are Loose connections Incorrect wiring including swapped wires Bad grounding Duplicate station numbers Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 The Complete Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 159 Diagnostic Situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal Operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive e 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive e 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic Loss of Communication The ACS550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in Communication Fault The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME The Complete Parameter Descriptions section describes these
130. 225 PFC acceleration time parameter 147 aux motor start delay parameter 138 aux motor stop delay parameter 138 control parameter group 136 deceleration time parameter 147 enable parameter 146 low frequency parameters 138 macro number of aux motors parameter 139 number of motors parameter 147 reference step parameters 136 start delay parameter 146 start frequency parameters 137 ACS550 User s Manual PID 0 actual signal parameter 123 100 actual signal parameter 123 actual input select parameters 125 actual value max parameters 125 actual value min parameters 125 adjustment procedure 121 control macro 48 correction source parameter 130 decimal point actual signal parameter 122 derivation filter parameter 122 derivation time parameter 122 deviation data parameter 68 error feedback inversion parameter 122 external trimming parameter group 129 external source activate parameter 129 feedback multiplier parameter 124 feedback select parameter 124 feedback data parameter 68 gain parameter 121 integration time parame
131. 25 Duty gt 29 Duty Ohm Ohm W W Ww Ww Ww Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100 06A6 2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500 07A5 2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200 012A 2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000 017A 2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000 024A 2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500 031A 2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Technical Data 234 A 380 480 Volt Drives ACS550 User s Manual Resistance Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Deceleration to Zero Rating P Type Code 7 rcont ACS550 P 3 Prio P 30 P 60 Continuous ON 01 01 Rmax Ru S3SON st0sON s30sON lt 60sON gt 60 s ON see below gt 27s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty Ohm Ohm WwW W Ww Ww Ww Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100 04A1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05A4 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 06A9 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 08A8 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012A 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 015A 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 023A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 500 600 Volt Drives Resistance Resistor Minimum Continuous P
132. 3 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 AO1 CONTENT 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 1507 AO2 CONTENT 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM Ao2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 60 60 60 60 60 60 62 60 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 53 Complete Parameter List for ACS550 The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are e S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped e User Space to enter desired parameter values Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the table by 01 or U1 Refer to the type code on the drive for example ACS550 01 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 Start Up Data 9901 LANGUAGE 0 13 1 0 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 8 1 1 v 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2 VECTOR TORQUE 1 3 v 3 SCALAR SPEED 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 115 345 V 1V 230 V v 01 200 600 V 1V
133. 35 a ojojo Center to center dimension Technical Data 242 Outside Dimensions Units with IP 21 UL Type 1 Enclosures ACS550 User s Manual D le H H2 be 4 o O O X0031 IP 21 UL type 1 Dimensions for each Frame Size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 4 9 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 10 4 300 11 8 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 4 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 124 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 739 29 1 880 34 6 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 Units with IP 54 UL Type 12 Enclosures H3 D IP 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in W 215 8 5 215 8 5 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 14 5 410 16 1 Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 243 IP 54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each Frame Size Ret R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm i
134. 3x70 137 1 153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1 0 186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2 0 215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3 0 249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4 0 284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Grou nd Connections For personnel safety proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations In multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Technical Data 224 ACS550 User s Manual Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 or EM3 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table In such networks the internal connection provided by the EM3 screw on frame sizes R1 R4 only must be disconnected by removing EM3 If the grounding configuration of the network is unknown remove EM3 Note that e ACS550 01 drives are shipped with the screw installed e ACS550 U1 drives are shipped with the
135. 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits 0 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See ABB Control Profiles Technical Data on page 169 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded Fieldbus 154 ACS550 User s Manual Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003
136. AM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Start Up 114 ACS550 User s Manual Group 35 Motor Temp Meas This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below n nsor One Senso Three Sensors gi n 7 A7 a R Al1 i i i Motor i z Motor z ta lAGND Ha rr JAGND a NG Bo T T T z AO1 h AO1 a Ipa tj JAGND V s 10 nF L 8 a Warning IEC 60664 reguires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or co
137. AY P 4025 Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION for at least this time period re starts the PID controller O Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 127 Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2 PID parameter set selection When set 1 is selected parameters 4001 4026 are used When set 2 is selected parameters 4101 4126 are used 0 SET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMER FUNCTION 1 4 Defines the Timer function as the control for the PID Set selection Timer function de activated PID Set 1 Timer function activated PID Set 2 e See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection e Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 e De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection e See DI1 INV above
138. Assistant autochange interval parameter 140 level parameter 141 OVEIVICW aaa da eae ee bee Lawa 141 starting order counter 141 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant panel 34 backing up parameters Basic panel 40 battery Assistant control panel 215 baud rate RS 232 parameter 133 braking components aaan 232 protection from overheated resistor 235 resistor heat dissipation 235 selecting brake choppers resistors 232 WING seda BA WA MGA GA PANGA deep aaa 235 break point frequency fault parameter 105 buffer overruns count parameter 133 C cable requirements grounding cee eee eee 223 input power 222 MOTOF g cca arg ani GA AkO aba ar aad a 228 Index ACS550 User s Manual CE marking iaie una eet ded kal bei edd 246 changed parameters Assistant panel 33 chopper see braking CISPR11 class A radiation limits 230 CISPR11 class B radiation limits 231 clock setting Assistant panel 33 comm config file CPI firmware revision parameter 132 config file id revision parameter 132 config file revision parameter 132 fault function parameter 106 fault
139. BB has brake choppers that when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with guickly decelerating a motor EMC Europe Australia and New Zealand This section describes conformance with EMC reguirements in Europe Australia and New Zealand CE Marking When a CE mark is attached to the ACS550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC The corresponding declarations are available on reguest and can be found using the internet at htip www abb com The EMC Directive defines the reguirements for immunity and emissions of electrical eguipment used in European Economic Area The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 covers the reguirements stated for drives such as the ACS550 The drive complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 C Tick Marking When a C Tick mark is attached to the ACS550 drive it verifies compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 1996 Adjustable speed electrical power drive Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 247 systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The drive complies with the First enviro
140. BK SEL or 4114 for the PFC freguency reference e The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A lt A B C A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running P 4014 Yo V Mains 3 3 Contactors Inlet Pipe 8122 8123 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows e Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output e Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY e Starts the speed regulated motor e Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay e After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control When enabled PFC control e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8
141. CRO VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606 SWITCHING FREQ INVALID VALUES 1 k kia Z EXTRA PARS 5 3401 DISP 1 SEL MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL EXIT EDIT In the above right details screen The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes details In general the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the backup file The second item listed is the default edit For tracking purposes an asterisk initially appears by each item As edits are made the asterisks disappear 2 In the illustrated example the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz but the target drive is limited to 8 kHz 3 Press EDIT to edit the parameter The display is the target drive s standard edit screen for the selected parameter 4 Highlight the desired value for the target drive 5 Press SAVE to save setting 6 Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining exception 7 When your editing is complete press READY in the Differences List and then select Yes save parameters Download Failures In some situations the drive may be unable to accept a download In those cases the control panel display is Parameter download failed plus one of the following causes Start Up 36 ACS550 User s Manual Set not found You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in the backup The remedy is to manually def
142. CURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 JAR AI lt MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off O lt DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Warning When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage eguipment 3108 JAR EXTERNAL FAULT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off O lt DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault EXTERNAL FAULT 1 or EXTERNAL FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103
143. CY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF3 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP OUT 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus Adapter 192 ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded State Comments 5 RAMP HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ ZERO RFG INPUT ENABLED RFG INPUT ZERO Normal operation Enter OPERATING Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET 0 gt 1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITE
144. D Effective if 1604 COMM OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 12 15 Unused 11 EXT CTRL LOC e EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit NAME NAME Correspond to ie AA the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 193 ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3_STA OFF3 inactive OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
145. D 0 0 3600 s 0 1s 1s 5s 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 s 0 1s 1s 3s 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 336 h 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 1 1 0 NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 10 s 0 01 s 0 5s 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 1 0 NOT SEL 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 O NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 7 1 0 NOT SEL Group 98 Options 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 4 1 O NOT SEL Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 65 Complete Parameter Descriptions Code This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550 Group 99 Start up Data This group defines special Start up data required to e Set up the drive Enter motor information Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language O ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRANCAIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 TURKCE 9902 9904 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL 8 TORQUE CTRL 0 USER
146. DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Group 32 Supervision 109 This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 Operating Data Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 Relay Outputs to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 3202 3203 3204 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter e Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized e The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO sHI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO lt HI e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV 2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit e Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises ab
147. Drive Low Voltage AC Drives User s Manual ACS550 01 Drives 0 75 110 kW ACS550 U1 Drives 1 150 HP ABR AA ED ED FADED ACS550 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 0 75 110 kW 1 150 HP Safety Installation Start Up Embedded Fieldbus e Fieldbus Adapter e Diagnostics e Maintenance Technical Data ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 110 355 kW 150 550 HP Safety Installation Start Up e Diagnostics e Maintenance e Technical Data ACS550 Technical Reference Manual available in electronic format only Detailed Product Description Technical product description including Dimensional drawings Cabinet mounting information including power losses Software and control including complete parameter descriptions User interfaces and control connections Complete options descriptions Spare parts Etc e Practical Engineering Guides PID 8 PFC engineering guides Dimensioning and sizing guidelines Diagnostics and Maintenance information Etc OPTION MANUALS Fieldbus Adapters I O Extension Modules etc manuals delivered with optional equipment Relay Output Extension Module typical title Installation Start Up e Diagnostics e Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual The Industrial wordmark and Product names in the form Drive are registered or pending trademarks of ABB CANopen is a registered tra
148. ER 6 The parameter set is transferred as directed During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percent of completion Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive The Basic control panel automatically handles these situations by e Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive Using parameter default values when the download provides no values or invalid values Alarm Codes The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code of the form A5xxx See Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel on page 210 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Start Up 42 ACS550 User s Manual Application Macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except e Group 99 Start up Data parameters except parameter 9904 e The PARAMETER LOCK 1602 e The PARAM SAVE 1607 e The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019 e The COMM PROT SEL 9802 e Groups 50 53 parameters e Group 29 Maintenance triggers After selecting a macro additional parameter changes can be made manually using the control panel Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By defau
149. Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Analog output AO2 Current J1 Constant speed selection DI4 5 Relay output 1 Ready 2 Al1 0 10V e Relay output 2 Running S Jp Al2 0 4 20 mA e Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 45 Application Macro Alternate This macro provides an l O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the drive To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example X1 7 1SCR Signal cable shield screen W2 JAH External speed reference 1 0 10 V in 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA xD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA t719 AGND Analog output circuit common C10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant spe
150. For shielded cable details see Motor Cable Requirements for CE amp C Tick Compliance below Grounding See Ground Connections in Input Power Connections above For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see Effective Motor Cable Screens below Drive s Motor Connection Terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See Drive s Power Connection Terminals above Motor Cable Requirements for CE 8 C Tick Compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or C Tick compliance Minimum Requirement CE 8 C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation able Core Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 229 Recommendation for Conductor Layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE 8 C Tick Allowed CE 8 C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically
151. Function activated START Timer Function de activated STOP See Group 36 Timer Functions 12 14 TIMER FUNCTION 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timer Function 2 4 See Timer Function 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 lt FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 75 Group 11 Reference Select This group defines How the drive selects between command sources e Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ e Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 e See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
152. Group 14 parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 1014 PAR PFC IO 2 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual 207 Fault Resetting A The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 Automatic Reset Warning If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following e From the control panel Press RESET Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SELECT the following could also be used to reset the drive e Digital input e Serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault
153. I5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19TRO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 1 The external reference is 20 ROTA fr Default operation used asa speed reference if a vector 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 mode is selected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable mole 2 Code 23 RO2A Mn Default operation 0 open 1 connected 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 DI DI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable f 0 0 Reference through Al1 26 RO3A x Default operation 1 O CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 274 O CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 e Analog reference Al1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 e Constant speed selection DI3 4 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 T TO CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting e Analog output AO1 Frequency e Analog output AO2 Current J1 e Relay output 1 Ready Sp Al1 0 10V e Relay output 2 Running S P AI2 0 4 20 mA e Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection DI5 e Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up 44 ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro 3 wire This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons and provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start
154. IELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 175 DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REQ CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK OFF ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation
155. INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function e 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If parameter value is 07 00 00 then the timer is 17 00 00 activated at 7 a m oe e The figure shows multiple timers on different 15 00 00 weekdays 13 00 00 12 00 00 10 30 00 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time e The time can be in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 then the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 Monday Ze Sunday If parameter value is 1 then timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 3606 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 Monday J Sunday If parameter value is 5 then timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 wee
156. LE 1 1 ENABLE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 1 O NOT SEL 3 lt LAST SPEED Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 59 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 60 0 s 0 1s 3 0 s 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 Group 31 Automatic Reset 3101 NR OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1 s 30 s 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1 s Os 3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3105 JAR OVERVOLTAGE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3107 JAR AI lt MIN 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 32 Supervision 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO 0 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0 Group 33 Information 3301 FW VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LP VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 3304 DRIVE RATING G
157. LT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 0404 SPEED AT FLT 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ AT FLT 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 1 V 0 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 55 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 1A 0 0408 TOROUE AT FLT 0 1 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 1 0 0410 IDI 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 IDI 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 as Par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 as Par 0401 1 0 Group 10 Start Stop Dir 1001 JEXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 v 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 0 v 1003 DIRECTION 1 23 1 3 v Group 11 Reference Select 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 2 1 1 1102 ExT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 v 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 1 1 v 1104 REF1 MIN 0 500 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 Hz O rpm 1105 REF1 MAX 0 500 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 50 Hz 1500 rpm U1 60 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 1 2 v 1107 REF2 MIN 0 100 0 600 for torgue 0 1 0 1108 REF2 MAX 0 100 0 600 for torgue 0 1 100 Group 12 Constant Speeds 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 v 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 0 500 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 300 rpm 5 Hz U1 360 rpm
158. MM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction O NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1 e Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 e See above DI1 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and DI4 e See above DI1 2 for code 10 D14 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 e Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0
159. NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI1 INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms e 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage alarm e 2003 Undervoltage alarm e 2009 Device overtemperature alarm 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled Start Up 90 ACS550 User s Manual Group 20 Limits This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed freguency current torgue etc Code Description
160. O2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 0 2 X 31 31 31 31 X 31 O Co Aux X X Aux Aux X Aux Aux Aux X Aux Aux X X X X X 31131 1 Aux Aux X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating DO Nf N NAA UX UX x V x gt lt gt lt x N BA gt lt X X X X X P x L x x x x o gt x x 2 x x w o a a XxX D gt lt X gt lt x gt lt X gt lt X gt lt x XxX D X X gt lt gt lt e The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or lt X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 Parameter Setting ACS550 Relay Assignment 1 Autochange Disabled a RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 ROG 2 1 31 1 31 x 31 Ohma PFC PFC X X PFC IPFC PFC X X P X PFC PFC X X X X X 31 31 PFC PFC X X X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control X X X P FC FC Q a al po a wy a 90 x x S x x ANA BA X X X X x A x L x x x o RA x x A x a o a a gt lt IG
161. ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 45 1 0 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 45 1 0 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 45 1 0 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 3600 s 0 1 s Os Group 15 Analogue Outputs 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 103 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0103 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0103 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 10s 0 1s 0 1 s 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 104 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0104 1509 402 CONTENT MAX z Defined by par 0104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 mA 1511 MAXIMUM A02 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER AO2 0 10s 0 1s 0 1s Group 16 System Controls 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 7 1 6 1 0 v 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 1 1 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 0 8 1 6 1 0 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 0 6 1 6 1 0 1606 LOCAL LOCK 0 8 1 6 1 0 1607 PARAM SAVE O DONE 1 SAVE 1 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 0 7 1 6 1 0 1609 START ENABLE 2 0 7 1 6 1 0 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 1 1 0 Group 20 Limits 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm v
162. RCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1 1 IDC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software type 4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved 5 DCUNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 Al1 LOSS ENCODER ERROR Reserved 7 Al2 LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 8 MOT OVERTEMP _ Reserved Reserved 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error 12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System error 13 EXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD 1 When an alarm is active the corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words e Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros anda 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0309 ALARM WORD 2 See parameter 0308 Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN 3 DIRLOCK Reserved 4 O COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING 5 Al1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING 6 Al2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START 9 MOT OVERTEMP R
163. T MIN 0 P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 0 o Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 77 1104 REF1 MIN NY Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 P1105 MIN in Hz rpm MAX e Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM Al2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment 1106 for the reference P 1104 Analog 1105 IREF1 MAX MIN input signal Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of or 1304 or 1305 full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Ext ref sets the maximum analog input signal A P 1104 MIN P1105 _ MAX Analog P 1301 or 1304 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Groups 40 and 41 7 gt P1302 input signal or 1305 1107 19 PID1 REF2 LIMIT EREC IS USRA SELECT MAX 1107 1108 z PFC 1 17 MIN 1107 1108 REF2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference
164. T2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 0 7 1 6 0 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 7200 rpm 0 0 120 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 Hz Start Up 62 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 s 0 1 s 60 s 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 60 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 Ext Trim PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 s 0 1 s 60 s 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 10s 0 1 s Os 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 10s 0 1s 1s 4205 JERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4206 UNITS 0 31 4 4207 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 1 0 4207 4209 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 1 100 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 v 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 1 40 0 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 4213 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 4214 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 O NOT USED 0 001 0 4216 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 v 4217 ACT2 INPUT Ved 2 v 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1
165. TEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER Al2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Start Up 122 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME A A Defines the PID Controller s integration time N Integration time is by definition is the time required to increase a the output by the error value D P 4001 10 e Error value is constant and 100 e Gain 1 C P 4001 1 e Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second t 0 0 lt NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller ERSS 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds pe P 4002 See 400
166. The display shows one of the parameters in the selected parameter group For example 0301 6 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired parameter 10 Press MENU ENTER either e Press and hold for about 2 seconds or e Press the key twice in quick succession The display shows the value of the selected parameter with under the value Note Briefly pressing the MENU ENTER key displays the parameter s current value for about 2 seconds During this display pressing the MENU ENTER key again also enables Raj Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired parameter value Note In SE pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys simultaneously displays the default parameter value In EE press MENU ENTER to save the parameter value being displayed Note If instead you press EXIT RESET the original or last saved parameter value is the active value Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Par Backup Mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters If two sets of parameters are defined both are copied and transferred when using this feature The Par Backup mode has three functions e uL Upload Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes a second set of parameters if defined and internal parameters such as those created by the Motor Id Run The Control Panel memory is non volatile e rE A Restore All Restores the full pa
167. The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior notice Technical Data 248 Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes 164 EFB mapping 162 1xxxx register EFB function codes 165 EFB mapping 164 3 wire MACrO 44 3xxxx register EFB function codes 165 EFB mapping 165 4xxxx register EFB function codes 167 EFB mapping 165 A ABB standard default macro 43 acceleration deceleration parameter group 95 at aux stop PFC parameter 147 compensation parameter 98 ramp select parameter 95 ramp shape parameter 95 ramp time PFC parameter 147 ramp zero select parameter 96 time parametert 95 activate external PID parameter 129 actual input PID parameters 125 actual max PID parameters 125 actual min PID parameters 125 actual values mapping FBA generic profile 200 scaling EFBcomm 157 scaling FBA ee 188 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 198 scaling FBA generic profile 200 alarm CODES A kaaa td Data ae dite a and kalala Na 208 codes Basic control panel
168. The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled Start Up 144 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allo
169. To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 150 of heavy duty or 110 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Rmax If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors The maximum continuous power rating for the resistors The rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant Maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins Minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking OFF gt ON Time OFF Time ie gi ON Ti i SON Ume Ji Cycle Time i Duty Cycle lt Cycle Time The peak braking power reguirement Type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the
170. Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock e De activating the digital input locks out local control e Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory e Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter e If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter e If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Start Up 88 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality O lt NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal e This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal e If the voltage drops and de activates this digita
171. X x x 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the gi interval between changes e The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when nepo the speed regulated motor is running e See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to a stop when autochange is li performed e Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS 1 value gt 0 0 0 lt NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes il Warning When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 interlocks value gt 0 M enabled During autochange the interlocks interrupt the drive s power output preventing damage to the Pa contacts ft PFC with Autochange mode H Relay Logic Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 141 Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange Overview The purpose of the autochange operation is t
172. al or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 v Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference gt 5 JAI2 Actual signal PID 0 20 mA PID 0 10V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint lt D 7 JAO Motor output speed 0 20 mA lt D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 779 JAGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 18 DI6 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A fn Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI3 DIA Output 23 ROZA uv Default operation 0 0 Reference through Al1 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 7 O CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 Falls Rose Ea oe 3 programmable N0 171C0NSTANT SPEED 2 1203 efault operation 27 RO3B oS Fault 1 25 connected to 27 1 CONSTANT SPEED 209 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference Al1 An
173. alog output AO1 Speed e Actual value Al2 Analog output AO2 Current Ji e Start stop hand PID DI1 6 Relay output 1 Ready Sp AI1 0 10V EXT1 EXT2 selection D12 e Relay output 2 Running S P gt AI2 0 4 20 mA Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 Run enable DI5 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro PFC 49 This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example X1 SCR B AH Ko AGND Ng 10V OD Al2 AGND AOT AO AGND D LD Habagat m10 24V r 11 GND 12 DCOM 13 DH 14 DI2 15 DI3 16 DI4 17 DI5 18 DI6 19 RO1C Signal cable shield screen External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 v Analog input circuit common Note 1 Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual 0 10V gt 0 50 Hz Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 Analog input circuit common PID setpoint Output freguency 0 20 mA Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA Analog output circuit common Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC Auxiliary voltage output common Digital i
174. ameter value Pressing both keys at the same time sets a parameter to its default value Press SAVE to save the new parameter value If the new value is the default value the parameter will no longer appear on the Changed Parameters listing Fault Logger Mode Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history fault state details and help for the faults Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu Press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 10 faults maximum 3 Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault e Details are available for the three latest faults Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault See Diagnostics section Note If a power off occurs only the three latest faults will remain with details only for the most recent fault Clock Set Mode Mi npa O INO Use the Clock Set mode to e Enable disable the clock function Set date and time e Select display format Select CLOCK SET in the Main Menu Press UP DOWN to step to the desired option Press EDIT Press UP DOWN to select the desired setting Press SAVE to save setting Start Up 34 ACS550 User s Manual Par Backup Mode The Assistant Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters The Par Backup mode has these functions Upload to Panel Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes user sets of parameters if defined and internal parameters such as those created
175. and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running e Default value is 0 Example An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe e The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When both auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 parameter 8104 reference step 2 When three
176. anical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL f Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function 92 a tapa 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function 46 Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly e Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 18 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz RE a Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz fiL fiH f2L f2H Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI lt 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 output A gt frer Hz s 0 o gt 2502 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI e Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO e Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 e See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for
177. anual DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 8 STPMODE EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode 0 no op 9 STPMODE C 1 Coast stop mode 0 no op 10 RAMP 2 1 Ramp pair 2 0 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 1 Ramp output to 0 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD 1 Ramp freeze 0 no op 13 RAMP IN 0 1 Ramp inputto 0 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode 0 no op 15 TORGLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2 0 Torque limit pair 1 DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF CONST 1 Constant speed ref These bits are only for supervision 0 no Op purposes 28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref 0 no op 29 LINK ON 1 Master is detected in link 0 Link is down 30 REQ STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is pressed the OFF button interlock 0 no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile 173 ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD See Parameter 5320 Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram
178. ar the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See the Power Connection Diagrams on page 15 for the resistor cable connection points Mandatory Circuit Protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor e Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example Li 12 L3 1 off E gt Fuses Il Il 2 1 3 5 13 3 Ga Dy man aag a o E Aha na OSA Nee rs n 2 4 6 14 4 x k acssso U1 V1 Wi Ka To Thermal switch standard in l ABB resistors Parameter Set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical Data 236 Control Connections ACS550 User s Manual Control Connection Specifications Control Connection Specifications Analog Inputs and See table heading Hardware Description on page 17 Digital Outputs Outputs Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1 5 k Maximum vol
179. arallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply Warning The ACS550 01 U1 is not a field repairable unit Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning unit contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement Warning The ACS550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on Warning The heat sink may reach a high temperature See Technical Data on page 216 Warning If the drive will be used in a floating network remove screws at EM1 and EM3 Frame size R1 R4 or F1 and F2 Frame size R5 or R6 See diagrams on page 15 and page 16 respectively Also see Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks and Floating Networks on page 224 Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB sales representative Safety ACS550 User s Manual Use of Warnings and Notes GB There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual e Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject e Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols
180. arameter automatically The format is XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a Defines the node address of the RS485 link unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to O before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the Defines the data length parity and stop bits tobe default value for this parameter is 1 used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is 0 EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words confo
181. are chosen as specified in this manual Technical Data 246 ACS550 User s Manual e The installation rules of this manual are followed UL CSA Markings When a UL mark is attached to the ACS550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of UL 508C When a CSA mark is attached to the ACS550 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of C22 2 No 14 The ACS550 is UL and CSA listed to 100 KAIC without use of input fuses or circuit breaker For end users convenience the section Fuses provides fuse recommendations Branch circuit protection must to be provided per local code The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and CSA C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM TIME The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient Conditions on page 244 for specific limits For open type enclosures units must be mounted inside an enclosure per National Electrical Code and local electrical codes Open type enclosures are IP21 UL type 1 units without the conduit box and or cover or IP54 UL type 12 units without the conduit plate and or top cover Brake chopper A
182. arged and preventing an undervoltage trip e The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan O DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 91 Code Description pot MNHM PREA NG Freq 2007 value ise 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range 0 7 z y Time See figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ P por Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 P 2007 0 p lime P 2007 P 2008 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 O MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as t
183. art uJpp 3 25 dangerous voltages 3 high temperatures 3 HENNO z ei Z rani paba Bab 3 not field repairable 3 parallel control connections 3 qualified installer 3 thermistor installation 114 weight ONG eee Lasting hala a iaanpakhala 243 wiring CONTOl PRE a ka nti nts Meade Pork i 17 fault parameter 107 installation 18 installation steps IP21 cables 19 installation steps IP21 conduit 20 installation steps IP54 cables 21 installation steps IP54 conduit 22 overview 13 requirements general 13 XYZ zero speed load fault parameter 105 257 Index AA ED ED PA ID ID 3AUA0000001418 REV E EN EFFECTIVE DEC 6 2004 SUPERSEDES JUNE 24 2004 ACS550 US 04 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FIN 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Telefax 4358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives 8 Machines 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 41 800 HELP 365 Telefax 41 262 780 5135
184. as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Note Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 237 Note Triacs used as sources for drive inputs may have excessive leakage current in the OFF state enough to read as ON to drive inputs Driving two or more inputs divides the leakage current reducing or eliminating the problem An alternative is to add a small capacitive load see figure A WARNING Relay coils generate noise kuk l spikes in response to steps in applied AC Coil ida poke power To avoid drive damage from such 33 Ohm spikes all AC relay coils mounted across BE ere S drive inputs reguire R C snubbers and all si DC relay coils mounted across drive Drive out i i i DC Coil Diode puts require diodes see figure a Outputs Analog Cables Recommendations for analog signal runs e Use double shielded twisted pair cable e Use one individually shielded pair for each signal e Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital Cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control Panel Cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet
185. asts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 Al2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault O NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input e Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 above 1 DI1
186. ating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 e Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0 e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Group 23 Speed Control 97 This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN Sets the relative gain for the speed controller Larger values may cause speed oscillation The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set proportional gain Gain Kp 1 T Integration time 0 Tp Derivation time 0 Controller output e Error value Kp re t gt 2302 INTEGRATION TIME y A Controller Output o Sets the integration time for the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set integration time Gain K 4 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation ti
187. ation time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R 1 R4 8 R7 R8 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual 203 Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct e A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor e Supply disturbances Reserved Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct e Missing phase in the input power supply e Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains Al1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Al2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct e Source and connection for analog input e Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT TEMP Motor is
188. autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACS550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange e Continues with normal PFC operation Starting Order Counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux 1 aux 2aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor seguence The lowest iMAX EM parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1 PFC last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm p 8119 oi 2015 PFC INTERLOCK Wh
189. auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 o o Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 137 Code Description 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if e No auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit f Hz 4 8109 1 Hz P8115 gt Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fax 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D m P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 e Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 4 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to z compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor fMIN See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C C
190. aximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM ACT1 A P 4019 l P 4018 l i i Pa P 1301 P 1302 Analog input signal ACT1 A B P 4018 P 4019 r P 1301 P 1302 Analog input signal Start Up 126 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function O NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e Activating the digital input activates the sleep function e De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm freguency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function e De activating the digital input activates the sleep function e Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function e See DI1 INV above 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL A t lt P 4024 A Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep il ae function a motor speed
191. ay Description 2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault OVERTEMP may be near R1 R4 8 R7 R8 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure e Obstructions in the air flow e Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink e Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check e Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 e Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check Motor and drive ratings match motor is NOT undersized for the drive Settings on parameters 3013 to 3015 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active note 1 To control PFC use parameter group 81 PFC CONTROL and Application Macro PFC on page 49 2015 PFC INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks
192. back to the Output mode Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive Some examples A download to an old drive specifies parameters values that are not available on the old drive A download from an old drive to a new drive does not have definitions for the new parameters parameters that did not originally exist A download can include an illegal value for the target drive e g a backup from a small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can only handle 8 kHz Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 35 As a default the control panel handles these situations by e Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive LOC G DIFFERENCES VALUES UNDER MIN 3 Using parameter default values when the VALUES OVER MAX 2 download provides no values or invalid values INVALID VALUES 1 e Providing a Differences List A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5 type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES 7 accept exactly as specified READY SEL You can either accept the default edits by pressing READY or view and edit each item as follows 1 Highlight an item type in the Differences List left screen below and press SEL to see the details for the selected type right screen below LOC G DIFFERENCES LOC G INVALID VAL VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MA
193. bling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 lt STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal e See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive e See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 149 Embedded Fieldbus Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at E terminals X1 28 32 H Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx L eT Two basic serial communications configurations are available Embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control syste
194. bus communications ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states e To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0302 0303 0304 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 e See parameter 0301 FB STS WORD 1 nee only copy of the Status Word 1 e The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros anda 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros anda 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 FB STS WORD 2 Read only copy of the Status Word 2 e See parameter 0303 Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0 STOP Reserved 1 START Reserved 2 REVERSE Reserved 3 LOCAL Reserved 4 RESET Reserved 5 EXT2 Reserved 6 RUN DISABLE
195. cation settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 5202 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same address are not allowed on line Range 1 247 BAUDRATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kbits s 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8N1 No parity one stop bit 1 lt 8N2 No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 Even parity one stop bit 3 801 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check e Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 5207 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise le
196. constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield Conductor and Shield e PE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE 8 C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm ZnO Effective Motor Cable Screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example Olflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2 Braided Metallic Screen L3 EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables To comply with EN 61800 3 requirements e Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in Effective Motor Cable Screens on page 229 e Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive e Motor cables must be grounded at the motor end with an EMC cable gland The ground must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable Technical Data 230 ACS550 User s Manual e For EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A and EN 61800 3 Second Environment compliance th
197. cribed earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the ACS550 User s Manual Complete Parameter List for ACS550 section For example Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile Data Word Contents Scaling 5 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 6 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 199 Generic Profile Technical Data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents o
198. cy 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM A11 COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference 4 Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 r 1009653777 SR on Input Signal 0 50 100 100 0 5 par 1105 Fieldbus Adapter 196 ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AIT COMM Al 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference ACorrection Coefficient N0096 se oa l l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt 0 50 100 REF2 COMM4AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correctio
199. d 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled PBB DROPUL 0 e CW OorRef 20 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Reg Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode parameter or the stop mode reguests bits 7 0 no op and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands 0 no op result in a stop command 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference EET defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals 0 E md control and the drive moves to fieldbus local xternal mode control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode no op Embedded Fieldbus 172 ACS550 User s M
200. d is found to be zero the torque boost is done 2102 2103 2104 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp e Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode e After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor e Set the pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold Speed ares a O NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See diagram T e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref 2105 When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive resumes normal operation DC Hold m T 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has Speed sj stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If pa
201. demark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org Profibus DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG 2004 ABB Inc All Rights Reserved ACS550 User s Manual Safety gt BBBB PPP PPE Warning The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a gualified electrician Warning Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the Power Circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK Warning Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover Warning Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the ACS550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs R01 R03 Warning When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in p
202. e Contact your local ABB sales representative and report the error number 102 RESERVED 103 SERF MACRO 104 RESERVED 105 RESERVED 201 DSP T1 Error in the system Contact your local ABB sales representative and report OVERLOAD the error number 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 204 DSP STACK ERROR 205 RESERVED OBSOLETE 206 OMIO ID ERROR 207 EFB LOAD ERROR Diagnostics 206 ACS550 User s Manual Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 1000 1001 PAR HZRPM PAR PFCREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range 5 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range 5 50 e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1301 Al 1 MIN gt 1302 Al 1 MAX e 1304 Al 2 MIN gt 1305 Al 2 MAX 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are
203. e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function Code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded Fieldbus 168 Actual Values ACS550 User s Manual The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are Specified using parameters 5310 5317 e Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive e 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer When negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value Scaled as described earlier in Actual Value Scaling Exception Codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Code Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS550 because it is one of the following e Outside min or max limits e Parameter is read o
204. e and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data section Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word e Can be used as speed or frequency reference e Isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer e Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data e Generic Profile Technical Data Actual Values Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example group 01 parameters can be mapped to Input Words using group 51 parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Planning Network planning should address the following questions e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network e What control information must be sent down to the
205. e control is only possible when the drive is under Local LOC control However the drive can be set up using Group 11 Reference Select to also allow reference modification when the drive is under remote REM control 1 Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes reF Reference e PAr Parameter e CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the reF Reference Mode 3 Press MENU ENTER The display shows the current reference value with under the value Note Normally reference adjustment is only possible here when under LOC control but settings in Group 11 do allow reference adjustments under REM control The display indicates when reference adjustment is possible at the control panel 4 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired reference value 5 Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Parameters Mode Use the Parameter Mode to set parameter values 1 Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes e reF Reference e PAr Parameter e CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the PAr Parameter Mode 3 Press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the parameter groups 01 99 Start Up 40 ACS550 User s Manual Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired group for example 03 5 Press MENU ENTER
206. e drive includes an internal filter that provides compliance for at least 30 m 100 ft motor cable lengths For some drives longer cable lengths require an additional external RFI EMC filter as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A Compliance Radiated and Conducted Emissions Drive Type Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 Max Length Internal Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter 8 kHz 2606 8 Max Length Internal Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter ACS550 x1 03A3 4 ACS550 x1 04A1 4 ACS550 x1 06A9 4 ACS550 x1 08A8 4 ACS550 x1 012A 4 R1 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 1 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 1 ACS550 x1 015A 4 ACS550 x1 023A 4 R2 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF21 3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF21 3 ACS550 x1 031A 4 ACS550 x1 038A 4 R3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF31 3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF31 3 ACS550 x1 044A 4 ACS550 x1 059A 4 ACS550 x1 072A 4 ACS550 U1 078A 4 ACS550 U1 077A 4 ACS550 x1 096A 4 R4 R5 30 m 100 ft I
207. e output See figure 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX P 1504 Sets the maximum content value P 1510 AO CONTENT e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1502 1508 Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will P 1503 1509 4 AO mA be converted to an analog output P 1505 1504 MINIMUM AO1 P 1511 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Sets the maximum output current 1506 1507 FILTER AO1 P 1504 Defines the filter time constant for AO1 P 1510 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified e See figure in parameter 1303 P 1503 1509 AO2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above AO CONTENT P 1502 1508 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 A02 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above Start Up 86 ACS550 User s Manual Group 16 System Controls This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable sig
208. eatures of PFC control are The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACS550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed freguency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a freguency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed freguency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output e An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors
209. ed by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory e Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock e See parameter 1602 above e The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once e This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source e Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source e Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication e The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an i
210. ed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 nore Relay output 1 programmable 20 ROTA Default operation E 21 RO1B B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 a a 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Default operation DI4 DIS Output 24 R02B Running gt 22 connected to 24 s Reference oe 1202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable CONSTANT SPEED 26 RO3A Hi Default ee tation i O i CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting e Analog reference Al1 e Analog output AO1 Speed e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current Ji e Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready Q Alt 0 10V e Ramp pair 1 2 selection D15 e Relay output 2 Running S p Al2 0 4 20 mA Run enable DI6 e Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up 46 ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro Motor Potentiometer This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the drive using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example X1 1 SCR Sig
211. elays No PFC Autochange Disabled P 8118 Autochange Enabled P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free Not allowed 1 DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 First PFC Relay DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Not allowed Not allowed motor e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFC Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up 146 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator e Use Regulator by pass control only in special f applications OUT O NO Disables Regulator by pass control The drive MAX uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control e The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference e The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 F
212. elects ramp pair 2 e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 above 7 lt COMM Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection 1 DIT INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 e Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection e See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Max Li Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ L moa f 3 figure e Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Pe B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 gt T Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY MAX S curve 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in figure Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve gt l g Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the T accelerati
213. en ACS550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e Ifthe PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first bullet above Start Up 142 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled e An interlock is active when its command signal is absent e An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present e The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC INTERLOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor e Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor O NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes e Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function
214. ent is out of range Contact your local ABB sales representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct e Missing mains phase e Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct e Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit e Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range e A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor e Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLED 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002 e Adequacy of motor braking torque e Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 26 RESERVED DRIVE ID Not used Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB sales representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB sales representative Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual 205 ore ay a In Description and
215. er screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2005 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 21 Wiring IP 54 UL Type 12 Enclosure with Cables 1 10 Route both cables through the clamps and tighten eg Strip and connect the power motor wires and the Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper Route control cable s through clamp s and Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and Strip and connect the individual control wires to Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive IP5003 On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the short pig tail short to minimize noise radiation the clamps IP5004 power ground wire to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimu
216. erence Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference Start Up 124 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Setting Al reference is calculated as following C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value lt COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constant value used for the process reference e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter
217. ers 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc e Top right shows the units for the parameter value e Bottom left shows OUTPUT Bottom right shows the motor direction of rotation Text display FWD or REV is Steady when the motor is up to speed Flashing slowly when the motor is stopped Flashing quickly when the motor is accelerating Operating the Drive LOC REM The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the remote control REM mode and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1 To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press If you e Press and release the display flashes LOC then the drive stops Use the Reference Mode to set the local control reference e Press and hold for about 2 seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r then the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control commands To switch back to remote control REM press Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 39 Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR parameter 1003 must be set to 3 REQUEST Reference See Reference Mode below Reference Mode Use the Reference Mode to set the speed or frequency reference Normally this referenc
218. es as appropriate Motor Data The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACS550 The drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the rating plate data Gather the following from the motor ratings plate Voltage e Nominal motor current e Nominal frequency e Nominal speed e Nominal power Edit parameters 9905 9909 to the correct values e Assistant Control Panel The Start up Assistant walks you through this data entry see page 31 e Basic Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 39 for parameter editing instructions Macros Note Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design since the wiring installed in Control Terminals Table on page 17 depends on the macro used Review the macro descriptions in Application Macros on page 42 Use the macro that best fits system needs Installation 26 ACS550 User s Manual 2 Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro e Assistant Control Panel Use either of the following Use the Start up Assistant which displays the macro selection immediately after motor parameter setup Refer to Parameters Mode on page 31 for parameter editing instructions e Basic Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 39 for parameter editing instructions Tuning Parameters The system can benefit from one or more of the ACS550 special fea
219. eserved 10 UNDERLOAD Reserved 11 MOTOR STALL Reserved 12 JAUTORESET Reserved 13 PFC AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFC INTERLOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Start Up 72 ACS550 User s Manual Group 04 Fault History This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred Either as e A date if real time clock is operating e The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as e Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating e The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set 0404 SPEED AT FLT The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 IDI 1 3 AT FLT The s
220. et for each combination of drive enclosure type IP 21 UL type and IP 54 UL type 12 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See Motor Cable Requirements for CE 8 C Tick Compliance on page 228 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and Notes U1 V1 W14 3 phase power supply input Input Power Connections on page 220 PE Protective Ground Ground Connections on page 223 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor Connections on page 227 The ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 208 240V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see Power Connection Diagrams starting on page 15 For specifications on power terminals see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 225 For frame sizes R1 R4 in unsymmetrically grounded networks see Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks on page 224 For floating or impedance grounded networks see Floating Networks on page 224 Ins
221. eter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select by 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACS550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See para
222. eters 91 ramp down parameter 99 ramp up parameter 99 torque control MAGO anag Past deke de te NGYN a 50 parameter group 99 ramp down parameter 99 ramp up parameter 99 vector torque mode 65 Index ACS550 User s Manual trim mode PID parameter 129 trim scale PID parameter 129 Ype COJE AA 8 U U f ratio parameter 101 UL marking 246 underload curve fault parameter 106 fa li code ai ii eld BG a NN 204 function fault parameter 106 time fault parameter 106 undervoltage automatic reset parameter 108 control enable parameter 90 ungrounded network see floating network units PID parameter 122 unpacking drive 8 unsymmetrically grounded networks 224 user parameter set change control parameter 87 download 34 V vibration stress testihg 244 voltage at fault history parameter 72 rating COIT aesa a mad had di kh eae dia 9 voltage frequency ratio parameter 101 W wake up delay PID parameter 126 wake up deviation PID parameter 126 warning automatic st
223. f the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference Scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic Profile Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus Adapter 200 Actual Value Scaling ACS550 User s Manual For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Complete Parameter List for ACS550 section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback Inte
224. f the unit Task PREPARE for installation v PREPARE the Mounting Location v REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive v INSTALL wiring v CHECK installatio o v RE INSTALL the cover v APPLY power START UP See Preparing for Installation on page 8 Prepare the Mounting Location on page 11 Remove Front Cover on page 11 Mount the Drive on page 12 Wiring Overview on page 13 and Install the Wiring on page 18 Check Installation on page 23 Re install Cover on page 24 Apply Power on page 25 Start Up on page 25 Installation ACS550 User s Manual Preparing for Installation Lifting the Drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpack the Drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive Identification Drive Labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either Serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes ACS550 01 08A8 4 U 3 380 480 V Pp Pha 4 3kW OO OO ODO 2030700001 I Ser no Type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the unit cover Input U 3 380 480 V
225. ference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2005 i o COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Caution If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 107 Code Description 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for e Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected e Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 lt DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 lt ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects pr
226. fined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 are met 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes 1 2 Drill the holes Xoo02 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts Remove Front Cover IP 21 UL Type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 Installation 12 IP 54 UL Type 12 1 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding hood in place If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover Remove the cover Mount the Drive IP 21 UL Type 1 1 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP 54 UL Type 12 For the IP54 UL Type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive
227. for analog input 2 A12 e See FILTER Al1 above Start Up 82 ACS550 User s Manual Group 14 Relay Outputs This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means O NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 lt READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Reguires e Run enable signal present e No faults exist e Supply voltage is within range e Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 lt STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 9 sUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 e See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 109 10 lt SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204
228. for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 157 Feedback from the Drive EFB Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 161 AA Modbus Protocol Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual Value Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Complete Parameter List for ACS550 section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter H pt Integer Resolution Feedback Integer
229. from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Control Word CW References Process I O TJ cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values Service _ NAI Parameter R W Reguests Responses lt gt N Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 183 Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA modul
230. gency stop command e De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command e De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command e Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command e See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost e See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 95 Group 22 Accel Decel This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 lt NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection e Activating the digital input s
231. ger Parameter Resolution z Integer Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 170 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete Parameter List for ACS550 section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Value of the Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Feedback parameter Parameter that Value of 100 Ref 100 g defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 201 Diagnostics A A Warning Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense Warning All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should on
232. gnetizing 93 TIYING STAM cia eS ade ad po dined nei Pet 93 start stop parameter group 93 start stop dir parameter group 73 starting order counter 141 start up MACIOS ini na NG GA de ai lin 25 motor data 25 TUNING zi Bad NA Na hh noe ae kina 26 start up assistant mode 31 start up data parameter group 65 state diagram comm EFB ad sa GAAN ARAL NG ee 177 comm ABB drives 194 station id RS 232 parameter 133 status at fault history parameter 72 status word ABB drives FBA description 192 comm EFB definition 172 EBA a Sconce aa et aa kh KA ae Rated ahah 183 FBA generic profile 199 ACS550 User s Manual stop aux motor PFC parameters 138 aux motor delay 138 CONBOM sebi kaaa AL eee eae Gee 30 dc brake time parameter 94 DC current control parameter 93 dc current ref parameter 94 emergency devices 222 emergency select parameter 94 flux braking parameter 101 function parameter 93 parameter group 93 supervision parameter group 109 parameter low limit parameters 109 parameter selection parameters
233. gs On the R6 frame size if the cable size used is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG or if no compression lugs are supplied use ring lugs according to the following procedure 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table 2 Attach the supplied terminal lugs to the drive end of the cables 3 Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing Technical Data 226 4 Attach terminal lug to the drive Wire Size Crimpi No ot s rimping 0 0 mm kcmil Manufacturer Ring Lug Tool Crimps AWG pa G Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 se A Burndy YA4C L4BOX MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 Ilsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 50 1 Ilsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 lIsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 55 1 0 lIsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lisco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 Ilsco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas 8 Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Compression Lugs Use the following procedure to attach cables 2
234. he control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 above 7 lt COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value e De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 O MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value e De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting
235. iagram ABB drives 194 status word aasa eee eee 183 status word ABB drives 192 compression lUGS 226 conduit Kiti zuna MING Kapa PAGE NAG 13 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 132 id revision parameter 132 revision parameter 132 connections COMO darna tain Pe ee Sard 17 diagram 2 inn Sist boot bo eh baliw hd te 17 EFB 0MM aa Bina ele DENG ete 150 FBA module 184 Naa NAPAG AE IRMA 17 constant speed see speed constant construction code 9 contamination levels environment limit 244 shipping limit 244 contrast control panel 28 control connection specifications 236 location data parameter 67 reference Assistant panel 30 shaft direction 30 start stop 30 terminal specifications 237 control cable connections eee 17 requirements 236 Index 250 control panel Xa anak mah via decreed 27 cable reguirements 237 comm error fault parameter 104 CONTRAST iiz ja ii RG AG Bots JE ode 28 display bar graph 112 display contrast 28 display decimal point form parameters 112 display max
236. ieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols Profibus DP LonWorks CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in ABB Drives Profile Technical Data on page 191 Fieldbus Adapter 182 ACS550 User s Manual Control Interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists 0f e Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Input Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen
237. ile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE Max Ref l l l Fieldbus Resultant Ref Reference Max Ref Max Ref Fieldbus 163 100 163 100 Resultant Ref 100 163 100 163 Reference i l l l Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref Fieldbus Reference Max Ref 163 100 100 163 Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 181 Fieldbus Adapter Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at L terminals X1 28 32 H Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx L eT Two basic serial communications configurations are available Embedded fieldbus EFB See Embedded Fieldbus on page 149 e F
238. inconsistent Check for any of the following e 1504 AO 1 MIN gt 1505 AO 1 MAX e 1510 AO 2 MIN gt 1511 AO 2 MAX 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 3 0 e Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are HP e g in US 1006 PAR EXTROMISSING Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following e Extension relay module not connected and e 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 1009 PAR PFCWOSCALAR PAR PCU1 Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR SPEED when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 1 lt 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between
239. ine the set or upload the set from a drive that has the desired set definitions e Par lock The remedy is to unlock the parameter set parameter 1602 Incompat drive model The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of the same type ACS industrial or ACH HVAC and the same model all ACS550 Too many differences The remedy is to manually define a new set or upload the set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive O Settings Mode panig BR oO N a Use the I O Setting mode to check and edit the setting at any I O terminal Select I O SETTINGS in the Main Menu Press UP DOWN to step to the desired I O group for example digital inputs Press ENTER Press UP DOWN to step to a particular item for example DI1 After a brief pause the displays shows the current setting for the selection Press EDIT 6 Press UP DOWN to select a new setting Press SAVE to save Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 37 Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features e Numeric control panel with a LCD display e Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time e Copy function Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Controls Display Overview The following table summarizes the button functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel LCD DISPLAY Divided into five areas e U
240. ines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMER FUNCTION 1 4 Defines the Timer function as the control for enabling external PID control Timer function active enables external PID control e See parameter Group 36 Timer Functions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control e Activating the digital input disables external PID control e De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control e See DI1 INV above OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output e When PID is activated output starts from this value e When PID is deactivated output resets to this value e Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference O NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rom Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Start Up 130 ACS550 User s Manual Code Descr
241. ing Faults Flashing Green Alarms ACS550 User s Manual For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive Flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors e Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB Actual Signals on page 70 for the bit definitions e Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists The recommended corrective action for faults is Use the Fault Listing table below to find and address the root cause of the problem e Reset the drive See Fault Resetting on page 207 Fault Listing Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceler
242. ings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol O ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive e During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check e Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol O IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXEC INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE
243. inor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification e File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module O IDLE Adapter not configured 1 lt EXEC INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error e The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 lt 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where e x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parametrer 5132 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 133 Group 52 Panel Communication This group defines the communi
244. ion The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in Diagnostics starting on page 201 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent Off line Occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by Marginally loose connections Wear on wires caused by eguipment vibrations Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 161 Modbus Protocol Technical Data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical in
245. iption 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2 REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B e 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is active A e 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2 OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 1 SPEED or 2 TORQUE e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904 MOTOR CONTROL MODE 3 SCALAR Add Ramped ref Trimmed ref Switch Select par 4230 trim scale Mul Mul gt p Ext ref 1 max A off x R x HP gt Ext ref 2 max B propor gt Abs Max Speed direct Select Freq C par 4232 Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref ty PID 2 Trimming PID2 out Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 131 Group 50 Encoder This group defines the setup for encoder use Set the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution Enable the encoder operation e Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset Group 50 Encoder Code Description RangeResolutionDefaultS 5001 5002 PULSE NR Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution ENCODER ENABLE Enables disables optional external encoder 0 DISABLE Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model applies for a
246. is disabled 1 Di1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on e The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 and with value 31 PFC e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay pi2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed DI1
247. kly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 Start Up 118 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day e See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time e See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time e See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day e See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day e See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster signal O NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DIH as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DIH as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel signal is released If parameter range is 01 30 00 then booster Booster active EN is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Activation DI af y Booster time 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC Defines the time periods used
248. l requirements specified for storage and transportation See Ambient Conditions on page 244 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level IP 21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Suitable Mounting Location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see Outside Dimensions on page 242 plus air flow space around the unit see Cooling on page 238 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See either Motor Connection Specifications on page 227 or Motor Cable Requirements for CE 8 C Tick Compliance on page 228 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See Weight on page 243 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 11 Installing the Drive A Warning Before installing the ACS550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Prepare the Mounting Location The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the reguiremenis de
249. l the mapping to each Modbus reference set 0xxxx Mapping Modbus Coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils Bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 163 e Relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL Ref All Profiles 5305 z 0 5305 z 1 5305 z 2 00001 CONTROL WORD BitO OFF1 STOP OFF 1 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14
250. l IR compensation values are Voltage 380 480 V Units PN kW 3 75 15 37 132 A IR Compensated IR comp V 18 15 12 8 3 B No compensation P 2603 2604 IR COMP FREQ f Hz Sets the freguency at which IR compensation is 0 V in B Bag o of motor frequency P 2604 2605 U f RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARE Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL and Switching Frequency Derating on page 219 e Higher switching frequencies mean less noise The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only on frame sizes R1 R6 Start Up 102 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2607 SW FREQ CTRL The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 internal temperature rises above a limit See Figure This function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 0 OFF The function is disabled 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure Ret R1 R6 Dri io Limit IVES Li
251. l input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal e See DI1 INV above Drive Started START STOP COMMAND Par Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Params 1608 8 1609 Rel Relay Energized elay STARTED De energized RELAY STATUS Par Group 14 Damper Open l Damper Damper Closed Closed DAMPER lag AA lt gt STATUS i Damper Damper Opening Closing Time Time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS l Acceleration Deceleration Time Time Par 2202 Par 2203 Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 89 Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 lt
252. ler feedback signal e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value e Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link e Used for relay output control e See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 69 Code Description 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 e Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Can not be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI The drive s accumulated power on time
253. lists the ACS550 environmental requirements Ambient Environment Requirements Storage and Transportation in the Installation Site protective package 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Al Huo Py and l derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft e Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F e Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Py and l derated to 90 e Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if A t moe Py and Ip derated to 80 temperature e Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and l derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 Relative lt 95 non condensing humidity e No conductive dust allowed Storage e The ACS550 should be installed in No conductive dust allowed cee aba to enclosure Chemical gases Class 1C2 Contamination R Solid particles Class 182 levels e Cooling air must be clean free from T A IEC 721 3 3 corrosive materials and free from ransportation electrically conductive dust No conductive dust allowed e Chemical gases Class 3C2 e Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 382 Solid particles Class 2S2 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 passes Stress Tests Without Shipping Package Inside Shipping Package Mechanical conditions In accordance In acco
254. long Output long Or long drive heavy duty current Type code on drive and rating table in Technical Data on page 216 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with the 208 240 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 2 or ACS550 voltage range 380 480 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 4 or 500 600 V for ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either the For ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 or a du dt filter is used between the motor and drive Tools Reguired To install the ACS550 you need the following e Screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used Installation 10 ACS550 User s Manual Wire stripper Tape measure Drill For installations involving ACS550 U1 frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP 54 UL type 12 enclosures A punch for creating conduit mounting holes For installations involving ACS550 U1 frame size R6 The appropriate crimping tool for power cable lugs See Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size Mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame Size Mounting Hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable Environment and Enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmenta
255. lt 1 ABB Standard is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section below Macro Default Values for Parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro ABB 43 Standard Default This macro provides a general purpose 2 wire l O configuration with three 3 constant speeds This is the default macro Parameter values are the default values defined in the Compl Connection example ete Parameter List for ACS550 on page 53 Me fi SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Alt External frequency reference 1 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Ng 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA lt D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 024v Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start lo 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 D
256. ltiple time periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME Timer 1 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMER FUNC3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMER FUNC4 SRC A parameter can be connected to only one timer Timer1 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC Timer2 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC gt 4027 PID PARAM SET 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS 1102 ExT 1 2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1440 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 117 Code 3601 Description TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal e The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 7 lt ENABLED Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1
257. lue will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLED 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 MOTOR ID RUN for a description of motor models Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 lt 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The panel s parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or pa
258. ly be undertaken by qualified service personnel The Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual must be followed Diagnostic Displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using e The green and red LED on the body of the drive e The status LED on the control panel if an Assistant control panel is attached to the drive The control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB Actual Signals on page 70 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to Ignore the error situation e Report the situation as an alarm e Report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by e Enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking e Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 e Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code Stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following buttons removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP button or DOWN button The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Diagnostics 202 Correct
259. m 49 gal h 58 inH5O 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft3 s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 Ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 lt rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 lb s 62 ms 117 ref 119 dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 113 Code Description 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL 3 PAR
260. m can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see Modbus Protocol Technical Data and ABB Control Profiles Technical Data later in this section e Fieldbus adapter FBA See Fieldbus Adapter on page 181 Control Interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of e Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 Input words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Embedded Fieldbus 150 ACS550 User s Manual Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used see ABB Control Profiles Technical Data on page 169 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power
261. m power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 225 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen screen into a pig tail tighten clamp s 9 11 analog l O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 8 the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 NG IP5005 Installation 22 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP 54 UL Type 12 Enclosure with Conduit 1 Daa Depends on Frame Size R1 R4 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive R5 and R6 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied P5016 Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable IP5007 size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 225 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig
262. me 0 _ _ _ cm e Error value t gt 2303 DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller e Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant Ae Error value change between two samples a K T ce k D k pa P Ts Kp xe z 4 1 Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Kp e Tp Derivation time gt 0 T Sample time period 2 ms Controller Output Error Value e Error value t Start Up 98 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation e Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration e 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action e Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine e The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation A
263. meter 0303 40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 167 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i
264. meter Value Description Reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by A35 CONN VALJE writing to parameter 0135 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling bis na values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for A01 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by 0156 CONN AUS writing to parameter 0136 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling ba HA values 1511 MAXIMUM A02 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for A02 Fieldbus Adapter 188 ACS550 User s Manual PID Control Setpoint Source Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops d Protocol Drive Parameter Value Setting Reference 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 comm ari 7 Alt 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 SOMA Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the Drive FBA Inputs to the controller dri
265. meter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 4 Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Embedded Fieldbus 162 ACS550 User s Manual Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus Addressing below ACS550 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes e Control Bits Coils 0xxxx 01 Read Coil Status e Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil e 15 Force Multiple Coils e Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status e Discrete Inputs e Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx e 04 Read Input Registers e Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers e Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register e References e 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers
266. mit R7 R8 Drives 12 kHz BZ An l ACS550 i Temperature Ara E E 1 O p 4 kHz ACS550 i Temperature KAZ ss AMAG 7 gt 1 Be 80 C 90 C 100 C 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in e A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR SPEED 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz and is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz O DISABLE 1 ENABLE Start Up ACS550 User s Manual Group 29 Maintenance Trig 103 This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code Description 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2902 2903 2904 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the act
267. mounting slots As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis Re install the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module ACS550 User s Manual IP2002 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 13 A Wiring Overview Conduit Gland Kit Wiring drives with the IP 21 UL type 1 Enclosure reguires a conduit gland kit with the following items Conduit gland box Five 5 cable clamps ACS550 01 only Screws Cover The kit is included with IP 21 UL type 1 Enclosures Wiring Requirements Warning Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550 The ACS550 must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following There are four sets of wiring instructions one s
268. n W2 225 89 225 89 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 145 410 16 1 H3 441 17 4 541 21 3 604 23 8 723 28 5 776 30 5 924 36 4 D 238 9 37 245 9 6 276 10 9 306 12 0 309 12 2 423 16 6 Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP21 ULtype1 6 5 14 3 9 0 19 8 16 35 0 24 53 0 34 75 69 152 IP 54 UL type 12 8 2 18 1 11 2 24 7 18 5 40 8 26 5 58 4 38 5 84 9 86 190 Degrees of Protection Available enclosures IP 21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles e IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP 21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP 54 UL type 12 enclosure has The same internal plastic shell as the IP 21 enclosure A different outer plastic cover e An additional internal fan to improve cooling e Larger dimensions The same rating does not require a derating Technical Data 244 ACS550 User s Manual Ambient Conditions The following table
269. n Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 r 100 Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 200 J lt lt r bira aaa kaan l l l Al1 Input Signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual Reference Handling 197 Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and ExT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Resultant Ref Max Ref x l l oo ae I I l l Fieldbus l l Reference 163 100 100 163 Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Macnab eed see Resultant Ref Fieldbus 163 100 100 163 Reference i i i I pi I Max Ref o 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Resultant Ref Max Ref l l Fieldbus 163 100 i riglerencs Ka 100 163 I Max Ref Fieldbus Adapter 198 Actual Value As des
270. nal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal e This digital input must be de activated for run enable e If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal e See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values e This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros e This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs e This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE O LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values e The lock can be open
271. nal cable shield screen z AH Not used Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 110V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA HD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA T119 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 Dl4 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 DI5 Constant speed 1 1202 Lo 148 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A m Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DI4 23 RO2A Default operation 74 RO B be Running gt 22 connected to 24 a O DE dance e nose Nolay haa a programmable The existing speed reference is efault operation i 57 RO3B IB Fault 1 25 connected 627 stored during stop or power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed e Reference up down DI3 4 e Analog output AO2 Current Ji Constant speed selection D15 e Relay output 1
272. ncy at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT e Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt Start Up 66 ACS550 User s Manual 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power e Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 MOTOR ID RUN To perform a Motor ID Run This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates the motor and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when e Operation point is near zero speed e Operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder First Start If no Motor ID Run is performed the drive estimates motor characteristics when the drive is first run This First Start occurs automatically at the next run command after any motor parameter is changed In order to estimate characteristics and create a motor model the First Start magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero speed Activating the First Start does require that e 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED and e 2101 3 SCALAR FLYSTART or 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST N
273. nductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this reguirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation e Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit e Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor Relay Thermistor 0 or 1 Thermistor 0 Thermistor relay OMIO board Ly a OMIO board DIG 24 VDC DIG NE __ 24 VDC Ca 3 0 nF Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 115 For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description 3501 See the figures in the introduction to this Group 3502 SENSOR TYPE Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT1
274. nel reference to the current external reference The drive stops e Release the button when LOCAL KEEP RUN is displayed to copy the current run stop status and the reference from the user I O To switch back to remote control REM press and hold the button until REMOTE CONTROL is displayed Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR parameter 1003 must be set to 3 REQUEST Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified when in local control LOC and can be parameterized using Group 11 Reference Select to also allow modification when in remote control REM Note The Start Stop Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local control LOC mode Other Modes Besides the Output mode the Assistant Control Panel has Other operating modes that are available through the main menu e A fault mode that is triggered by faults The fault mode includes a diagnostic assistant mode An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms Access to Main Menu and the Other Modes To reach the main menu Press EXIT as necessary to step back through the menus or lists associated with a particular mode Continue until you are back to the Output mode OC
275. ner of the LCD display Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD Display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive STOP Stops the drive in local control LCD Display Divided into three main areas Top line variable depending on the mode of operation For example see Status Information on page 29 Middle area variable in general shows parameter values menus or lists Bottom line shows current function of the two soft keys and the clock display if enabled General Display Features Soft Key Functions Soft key 2 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower right corner of the LCD display Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD Display e Decrements a value if a parameter is selected e Decrements the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video display Help Displays context sensitive information when the button is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the middle area of the START Starts the drive in local control
276. ng to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL reguires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded Fieldbus 170 ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 5319 Commanded Bit Name Value State Comments 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence e Enter OFF1 ACTIVE e Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFFS are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 3 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence e Enter OFF2 ACTIVE e Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0
277. nly e Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected For the Modbus protocol a drive parameter in group 53 holds the most recent exception code Code Description 5318 EFB PAR 18 Holds the most recent exception code Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 169 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data Overview ABB Drives Profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU Profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states accordi
278. nment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 Electromagnetic Environments Product standard EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods defines First Environment as environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Liability Limits The manufacturer is not responsible for e Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation e Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing
279. nput The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group 6 THERMISTOR 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor e Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1Al1 PT100 and PTC 2 Al2 PT100 and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR OVERTEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOTOR OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Start Up 116 Group 36 Timer Functions ACS550 User s Manual This group defines the timer functions The timer functions include e Four daily start and stop times e Four weekly start stop and boost times Four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to mu
280. nput common for all Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive Relay output 1 programmable 20 ROTA f Default operation 25 RO3C 21 RO1B t Running gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A pa Default operation 24 RO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 26 RO3A Relay output 3 programmable Default operation TN 27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting e Analog ref and actual Al1 2 e Analog output AO1 Frequency Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 Ji Run enable D12 e Relay output 1 Running Sh Al1 0 10V EXT1 EXT2 selection D13 e Relay output 2 Fault 1 S P AI2 0 4 20 mA Interlock D14 5 e Relay output 3 Aux motor ON Start Up 50 ACS550 User s Manual Application Macro Torque Control This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CONTROL Connection example X1
281. nternal 100 m 330 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 1F41 3 ACS550 x1 124A 4 ACS550 x1 157A 4 ACS550 x1 180A 4 ACS550 x1 195A 4 R6 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 2 Note 1 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 1F41 3 Note 2 100 m 330 ft Note 1 Internal Note 2 Note 2 1 For any motor cable length up to the100 m maximum length limit compliance does not reguire an additional filter 2 Data not available at time of publication Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 231 e For EN 61800 3 First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B compliance with conducted emission limits all drives require an additional external RFI EMC filter and cable lengths are limited as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Note The filter does not assure compliance with radiated emissions limits Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800 3 CE First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B Compliance Conducted Emissions Only Drive Type Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 Max Length RFI EMC Filter 8 kHz 2606 8 Max Length RFI EMC Filter
282. nverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source e De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 87 Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set e See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO e The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification e Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 e See parameter 1401 O NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets e The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input e The User Parameter Set changes only when the
283. ny setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 lt ENABLE Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 and an encoder Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED the encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 2 VECTOR TORQ the encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED the encoder provides speed feedback This is not closed loop speed regulation However using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the drive response if the encoder signal is lost 1 FAULT A fault is generated and the motor coasts to a stop 2 WARNING An alarm is generated and the ACS550 operates as is if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 DISABLE that is speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model 5010 Z PLS ENABLE Enables disables the use of an encoder s Z pulse to define the motor shaft s zero position When enabled a Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft s zero position This function requires an encoder that provides Z pulse signals 0 DISABLE Z pulse input is not present or ignored if present 1 ENABLE A Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero 5011
284. o equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function reguires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections e Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the PID Output following see figure 4 4PFC A e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 WA autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL sne Stops the speed regulated motor P 8119 7 3PFC e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFC e Increments the starting order counter to change the 4PFC starting order for the motors 2PFC T e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor 1PFC t e Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was gt P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated MO Pee a P8118 motor The
285. oblems Start Up 108 ACS550 User s Manual Group 31 Automatic Reset This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 NR OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more e If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains Trial time stopped m Time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control x xx Re panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 3102 TRIAL TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets e See 3101 NR OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart e If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset e Automatically resets the fault OVER
286. ode lock parameter 87 lock control panel access IP54 24 drive control at local control panel 87 parameters 000000 86 low frequency PFC parameters 138 lugs for R6 power cables 225 Index ACS550 User s Manual M macros SWIC rw euch in aden ate LAAN AN Doria plete 44 ABB standard default 43 alternate aa ha adi o a ah 45 hand auto 47 motor potentiometer 46 parameter default values 51 parameters not changed PEG nA LAAL Nana Bos ANN aa 49 PID CONT MAPA 48 torque control 50 main menu control panel Assistant 30 mains see input power maintenance CAPACILONS DNA BANDANA 214 control panel 215 heatsink 212 internal enclosure fan 214 intervals e a ka KENA aa eg ba ng 212 mainan Dha asa vale me teeta TA 213 triggers parameter group 103 manual Sa er ine ro rut oken laks Mo 2 mapping actual value FBA generic profile 200 EFB modbus 162 materials 245 maximum frequency parameter 91 torque limit parameters 92 torque select parameter 91 minimum frequency parameter 91 torque limit parameters
287. omentary push buttons the P stands for pulse e Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 e Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 4 DI1P 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DIP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 e Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 e Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel e Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3
288. on 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections e Check for correct faults in the input wiring e Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected Check for and correct e Disconnected load e Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB sales representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the OITF and OINT boards Contact your local ABB sales representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB sales representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurem
289. on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The freguency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACS550 Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0105 TORQUE Output torgue Calculated value of torgue on motor shaft in of motor nominal torgue 0106 POWER The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE The DC bus voltage in VDC as measured by the ACS550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centigrade 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R The drive s accumulated running time in hours h e Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0118
290. on ramp time A gt 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 7 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for PC o ORA CET RATION INE ram B 2204 RAMP SHAPE p pair 1 2205 JACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time s for zero to maximum freguency for ramp pair 2 See 2002 ACCELER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum freguency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2003 DECELER TIME 1 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2004 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 JEM DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum freguency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL Ramp is linear Start Up 96 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 O NOT SEL 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 e Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 e De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 e De activ
291. ote If you change motor parameters after running a Motor ID Run repeat the Motor ID Run O NO ID RUN Motor ID Run process is not running 1 lt ID RUN Enables a Motor ID Run at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 1 De couple load from motor or otherwise reduce load to near zero 2 Verify that motor operation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor in the forward direction confirm that forward rotation is safe e The run automatically operates the motor at 50 80 of nominal speed confirm that operation at these speeds is safe 3 Check following parameters if changed from factory settings e 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 e 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of motor rated speed e 2003 MAX CURRENT gt 100 of long value The maximum torque parameters 2014 2017 and or 2018 gt 50 4 At the Control Panel select e Select Parameters e Select Group 99 Select Parameter 9910 e Set value to 1 and press Enter The display shows a warning e Press START The display shows the progress of the run Note Pressing STOP or removing the run enable signal stops the ID Run In this case you ll need to repeat the Motor ID Run to create the motor model Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 67 Group 01 Operating Data This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based
292. otor cables are NOT connected to the drive Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 At the drive end of the motor cable measure the insulation resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective o Earth PE Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that ohm resistance is greater than 1 Mohm IG Installation ACS550 User s Manual 19 Wiring IP 21 UL type 1 Enclosure with Cables 1 On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See Conduit Gland Kit above Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the short pig tail short to minimize noise radiation IP2001 5 Route both cables through the clamps m a 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 225 X0005 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s 10 12 13 14 15
293. oup 22 motor is switched on parameters 2203 or 2206 e Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group22 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates ACCEL DECEL using 8125 DEC IN AUX START Applies only until the output of the regulated motor At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 lt NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using the Timer function See parameter 8119 AUTOCHANGE LEVEL O lt NOT SEL 1 TIMER FUNCTION 1 Enables autochange when Timer function 1 is active 2 4 TIMER FUNCTION 2 4 Enables autochange when Timer function 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors e This value includes also the speed regulated motor e This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFC if the autochange function is used e If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PEC but it needs to be included in this value Start Up 148 ACS550 User s Manual Group 98 Options This group configures for options in particular ena
294. ove the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI The lowest limit Hi 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit active e Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER Or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit e Case B Parameter 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV LO sHI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of ence parameter HI 3203 LO 3202 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 0 LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of Supervised Parameter LO 3202 HI 3203 Ca
295. ower Rating Type Deceleration to Zero Rating Pison Code P Po Piso P o Continuous ON ACS550 p Raw S3SON lt 10sON lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60SON U1 MAX MIN 5 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF see below lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty Ohm Ohm Ww Ww W W Ww Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462 03A9 6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144 06A1 6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573 09A0 6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Rain Minimum allowed braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 235 P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONyax time Installing and Wiring Resistors All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat A Warning The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials ne
296. parameters 112 display min parameters 112 display process variables parameter group 112 display selection parameters 112 display units parameters 112 parameter lock parameter 86 pass code parameter 86 reference control parameter 75 signal max parameters 112 signal min parameters 112 SOM KEY Sa NAA NANANA ui ka via 28 control panel Assistant 27 battery paabutin na aaa 215 changed parameters mode 33 clock set mode 33 controls overview 28 fault logger mode 33 I O settings mode 36 main MENU eee eee 30 output mode i aurana i 28 parameter backup mode 34 parameters mode 31 rotating atrow 29 SOKOV neo A RI TU 28 start up assistant mode 31 control panel Basic alarm codes 210 controls overview 37 output mode anaa 37 parameter backup mode 40 parameters mode 39 control word ABB drives FBA description 191 comm EFB description 169 FBA BAN Ala 182 FBA generic profile 199 controls overview Assistant panel 28 controls overview Basic panel
297. pper left Identifies control location local LOC or remote REM Upper right Identifies parameter units e Center Variable in general shows parameter values menus or lists Also displays a code for control panel errors See Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel on page 210 e Lower left OUTPUT in the control mode or MENU when selecting alternate modes e Lower right Motor rotation direction and indicates when a value can be edited M MENU ENTER key Enters deeper into menu level At deepest menu level saves display value as new setting EXIT RESET key Exits to next higher menu level Does not save changed values Down Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected e Decreases the reference when in the reference mode of operation Up Scrolls up through a menu or list e Increases a value if a parameter is selected e Increases the reference when in the reference mode of operation DIR key Changes the motor s direction of rotation LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive STOP Stops the drive START Starts the drive FM Output Mode Use the Output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the Output mode
298. puts Code Description 1301 MINIMUM A11 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM Al cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal e Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER Al1 y A Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time specified 100 63 RY Filtered signal gt t SS Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e See MINIMUM Al1 above 1305 MAXIMUM A12 Defines the maximum value of the analog input e See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant
299. r s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0125 ao2 0 20 mA 0 1 mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 1000 0 1 S 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 100 0 1 S 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 432767 1 0 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 432767 1 0 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 0140 RUN TIME 0 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 1 0 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI Days 1 day 0 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO hh mm ss 1 2s 0 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 0 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32767 1 50 019 0 0147 MECH REVS 32767 32767 1 0 0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0 1 1 0 Group 03 FB Actual Signals 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 0 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0 Group 04 Fault History 0401 LAST FAU
300. rameter delay time parameter external fault parameter number of trials parameter overcurrent parameter parameter group trial time parameter undervoltage parameter resolution listing for parameters resonance avoiding select parameter revolution counter data parameter nng TUgSa a Ka ea E Re peni ee KG rotating arrow control panel RS 232 baud rate parameter parity parameter station id parameter 255 RS 232 counts buffer overruns parameter 133 CRC errors parameter 133 frame errors parameter 133 ok messages parameter 133 parity errors parameter 133 RS485 comm 150 run enable source select parameter 86 run time data parameter 67 69 S SALCLY sin va eat kb ple NG ie Wa ip ee 3 save changes parameter 87 scalar speed mode 65 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 198 actual value FBA generic profile 200 actual values EFBcomm 157 reference EFB ABB drives profile 178 reference FBA ABB drives profile 195 reference FBA generic profile 199 s curve ramp parameter 95 sensor
301. rameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Start Up 94 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 DC CURR CTL lt 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is reguired e A fault is reset e Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active e Mode changes from local to remote e Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 O OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 JEM STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated e Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart O NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command e Activating the digital input issues an Emer
302. rameter set s from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives Note The Restore All function writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 41 dLP Download Partial Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and Group 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same e dL u1 Download User Set 1 Copies USER s1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive e dl u2 Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes reF Reference e PAr Parameter e CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the CoPY Copy Mode Press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following copy options e uL Upload rE A Restore All e dL P Download Partial 4 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired option 5 Press MENU ENT
303. rameter sets 34 Index ACS550 User s Manual drive EFB comm installation 150 FBA module installation 184 id fault code iii AA paa ata apace 204 mounting 12 mounting dimensions 241 outside dimensions 242 rating parameter 111 temperature data parameter 67 WEM ss zi naa pa NG 243 drive on time data parameters 69 E earth fault fault code 204 parameter isis aaa Ka DAG AA tia 106 earthing see ground EFB baud rate parameter 134 config file fault code 205 control profile parameter 134 CRC errors count parameter 134 fault code Sii a an AGA DE nG 205 ok messages count parameter 134 parameters 134 135 parity parameter 134 protocol id parameter 134 protocol parameter group 134 station id parameter 134 status parameter 134 UART errors count parameter 134 efficiency 238 EM3 screw 224 embedded field bus see EFB EMC CE markingss3 rasne o ae tebe 3G 246 C Tick marking 246 motor cable requirements 228 emergency deceleration time parameter
304. rameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running Diagnostics ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 Drive is not ready e g due to Low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081
305. rdance with ISTA 1A and 1B Sinusoidal with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications vibration e 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms 36 fts Not allowed 76cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 46cm 18 in frame size R3 31cm 12 in frame size R4 25cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm 6 in frame size RE Free fall Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 245 Material Specifications e PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y RAL 90021 PMS 420 C and 425 C e Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the
306. reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that e Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 Al1 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value AI reference is calculated as following Setting C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value lt COMM for values 9 10 and All for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference Al1 for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C 25 P 4012 SETPOIN
307. rent For example XXX 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8 8 Amps e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 Volt rating 4 indicates a 380 480 Volt rating 6 indicates a 500 600 Volt rating Start Up 112 ACS550 User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P3404 P3405 Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in P 0137 the control mode e Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected P 0138 e Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph P 0139 The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 not selected First parameter not displayed 101 199 Displays parameter 0101 0199 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the speed of a P 3407 conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max mo
308. rms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 153 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB Controlling the Drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires e Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent RN Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus
309. ro select parameter 96 time parameter 95 default macro 43 default values listing for Macros 51 listing for parameters 53 derating adjustment example 219 AMIE tee AnG Nain NANG sean shies ee 219 single phase supply 219 switching freguency 219 temperature 00 aaa aaa 219 derivation time PID parameter 122 derivation time parameter 97 device overtemperature fault code 202 diagnostics 201 EPB COMM ista cy dena eons Phere dees 158 FBA comm 189 differences list downloads 35 digital cable requirements eee eee 237 digital input at fault history parameters 72 connections 17 specifications 17 status data parameter 67 digital output connections 17 specifications 236 dimensions drive mounting 241 drive outside 242 direction CONTO sei s AA PA 30 control parameter 74 display format PID parameter 122 disposal si aer eel ge ANDA a Tanya 245 download LE Se Maile AA AE AI RA EO VE ah 35 handling inexact transfers 34 41 pa
310. rocess PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters e Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 and e Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID Controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 in 2 different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set Parameter 4230 to value 0 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID Controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At0 1 the PID Controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure lnitially set e 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 IN
311. roup 34 Panel Display Process Variables 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 100 199 1 103 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN 1 3403 SIGNAL 1 MAX 1 3404 OUTPUT 1 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 3405 OUTPUT 1 UNIT 0 127 1 3406 OUTPUT 1 MIN 1 r 3407 OUTPUT 1 MAX 1 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100 199 1 104 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN 1 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX 1 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM 0 8 1 3412 OUTPUT 2 UNIT 128 127 1 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN 1 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX 1 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 199 1 105 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 1 Start Up 60 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 1 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 0 8 1 3419 OUTPUT 3 UNIT 128 127 1 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 1 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 1 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 110 C 1500 Ohm 0 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 130 C 4000 Ohm 0 Group 36 Timer Functions 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 0 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3603 sTOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 1 7 1 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59
312. s FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent B baa Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1001 EXT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus Adapter 186 ACS550 User s Manual p RE Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1002 EXT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires Drive parameter value set as defined below e Fieldbus controller supplied reference word
313. s in the stall region see figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 or the limit on the COMM input 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME e The drive coasts to stop sA fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME A warning indication is displayed The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME 3011 STALL FREQUENCY This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function YS Stall region 95 User Limit f Fo 3011 STALL FREQ HI Start Up 106 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The protection is activated if e The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE e This condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME e Output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal frequency O NOT SEL Underload protection is not used 1 FAULT When the
314. s the reference Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 177 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 oe OFF3 OFF2 SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 V gt gt From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 GI LON MAINS OFF SW Bit6 1 SW Bitt 0 OFF1 INHIBITED ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt A BCD NOT READY Dar TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx XXXX x110 OPERATION READY TO it0 SW Bit2 0 INHIBITED SWITCH ON P BI OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx X1XX xxxx x111 gt B C D READY TO ue OPERATE SW BILAN CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED PV BES A q CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 LS i e Bit 4 1 KEY RFG OUTPUT State D ENABLED mm State change E B lt CW Bit6 0 Path described in example CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD gt i e Bit 5 1 SW STATUS WORD RFG ACCELERATOR RFG Ramp Function Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT C Pa f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 n lt Speed i e Bit 6 1 Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any o
315. same peak torque and ON time Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual Avg Braking Power Overhauling Load Avg Braking Power During Deceleration to Zero 233 Power 4 Deceleration Curve Overhauling Load Curve lea 4 Time Temperature 2x X a AN Ti ime The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables e First determine your maximum braking time ON ONyax minimum braking time OFF OFFyin and load type deceleration or overhauling load e Calculate duty cycle Duty Cycle ONyax ONyax OFFyin 100 e In the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONyax lt column specification and Duty Cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column For overhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 Volt Drives Resistance Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Type Deceleration to Zero Rating Bi i Code Pr3 Pro Pr30 P 60 Continuous ON ACS550 p Raw lt 3SON lt 10sON lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60SON 01 U1 MAX MIN Z 27s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF see below lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt
316. se A Energized 1 4 t 0 Case B Energized 1 0 1 PARAM above A Bra led ist A Active Limit A A He ee 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 3207 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 sUPERV 1 PARAM above Start Up 110 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 111 Group 33 Information This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FW VERSION Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LP VERSION Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amps If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the cur
317. selected in the timer 23 B P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 3 2 and 1 selected in the timer 24 B P4 Booster and Time Period4 selected in the timer 25 B P4 P1 Booster and Time Period4 and Time Period1 selected in the timer 26 B P4 P2 Booster and Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer 27 B P4 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 2 and 1 selected in the timer 28 B P4 P3 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 29 B P4 P3 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 1 selected in the timer 30 B P4 P3 P2 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 and 2 selected 31 B P4 P3 P2 P1 Booster and Time Periods 4 3 2 and 1 selected 3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC e See parameter 3626 3628 TIMER FUNC3 SRC e See parameter 3626 3629 TIMER FUNC4 SRC e See parameter 3626 Start Up 120 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID Controller Basic Set up In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value ACS550 User s Manual Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature
318. stop buttons are disabled Connection example X1 7 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAH External speed reference 1 0 10 V oo 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common DH 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA lt D 8 JAO2 Output current 0 20 mA 1719 JAGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 141 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 1121DCOM Digital input common for all J13 DI1 Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 ROTA Default operation a 21 RO1B D Ready gt 19 connected to 21 Da aa 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO A fu Default operation DI4 DIS Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 O JO Reference through Alt 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A Default operation O 1 CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 T CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204
319. t 2 provides reference 8 comm Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM All Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 coMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DIZ increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero e NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except e Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 all Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 All Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Ref
320. t 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL Embedded Fieldbus ACS550 User s Manual 165 Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DI1 DH Di 10034 DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DI6 DI6 DI6 Active low For the 1xxxx registers e Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function Code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers Any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS550 Reference All Profiles Remarks 30001 All This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function Code Description 04 Read 3xxxx input status 4x
321. t occurs 25 All LOSS Energize relay when Al1 signal is lost 26 Al2 Loss Energize relay when Al2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 29 UNDERLOAD Energize relay when an underload alarm or fault occurs 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFC Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC Control e Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed e Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER S2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 83 Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication e Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 il 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
322. tage for digital inputs is 30 V e Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC e Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays e Max continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 A rms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable Specifications See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Control Cables General Recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above a Double Shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Single Shielded Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog I O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible e Stay at least 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable e Do not mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable e Run relay controlled signals
323. tail 10 11 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Installation ACS550 User s Manual Check Installation Before applying power perform the following checks 23 v Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven eguipment are ready for start For floating networks The internal RFI filter is disconnected screws EM1 8 EM3 or F1 8 F2 The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive
324. tallation 14 ACS550 User s Manual e For frame size R6 see Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 225 to install the appropriate cable lugs e For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame Size Terminal Description Braking Accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See Brake Components on page 232 R3 R4 R5 RE UDC UDC DC bus Contact your ABB representative to order either Braking unit or Chopper and resistor When installing control wiring refer to the following as appropriate Control Terminals Table on page 17 Control Connections on page 236 Application Macros on page 42 Complete Parameter Descriptions on page 65 Embedded Fieldbus on page 149 Fieldbus Adapter on page 181 Installation ACS550 User s Manual 15 Power Connection Diagrams The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals Diagram shows the R3 frame JP DIP Switches tor Analog Inputs Other frames have similar layouts J1 2 Alt in Voltage Position BARA m Q gt Al2 in Current Position j X1 Analog Inputs and Outputs and 10 V Ref Voltage Output Power LED Green Fault LED Red X1 Digital Inputs and 24 V Aux Voltage Output X
325. tatus of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 73 Group 10 Start Stop Dir This group e Defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes e Locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands O NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction e Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop e Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through m
326. ter 122 internal setpoint parameter 124 offset parameter 129 output data parameter 68 parameter set select parameter 127 process sets parameter groups 120 scaling 0 100 parameters 123 setpoint maximum parameter 124 setpoint minimum parameter 124 setpoint select parameter 123 setpoint source EFB comm activate 156 setpoint source FBA comm activate 188 setpoint data parameter 68 sleep delay parameter 126 sleep level parameter 126 sleep selection parameter 126 trim mode parameter 129 trim scale parameter 129 units actual signal parameter 122 wake up delay parameter 126 wake up deviation parameter 126 PID controller advanced set up 121 basic set up 120 planning FEB COMM vani fe hh Ak a ana sepa aie 150 FBA comm 183 PNP a kaagahan ana aa tt cowed OBE 18 power data parameter 67 first applied 0002 2 25 previous faults history parameters 72 process PID sets parameter groups 120 process variables data parameter 68 profiles comm EFB 162 proportional gain parameter
327. terface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACS550 supports RTU only Feature Summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Holding Registers Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACS550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 4 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS550 the entire Holding Register para
328. ther source e g digital input D TI Embedded Fieldbus 178 Reference Scaling ABB Drives and DCU Profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU ACS550 User s Manual profiles ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Reference 3 Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by a frequency 0 lt 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speedor 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by re frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 Speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torgue1 or 2016 410000 par 1108 2018 torgue2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 410000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profiles 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 100 0 5 par
329. tion information see the following X00302 e Communication Set up FBA below e Activate Drive Control Functions FBA on page 185 e The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 185 Communication Set up FBA Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module e Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional l O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters e Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled e Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters Activate Drive Control Function
330. to applicable safety regulations including but not limited to both national and local electrical codes Be locked in the open position during installation and maintenance work The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor Instead use the control panel or commands to the I O terminals for motor control Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 221 Fuses 208 240 Volt Drives ACS550 x1 Input Current Mains Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 75 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 Fuses 380 480 Volt Drives ACS550 x1 Input Current Mains Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 05A4 4
331. tor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor Display Value speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display P 3406 Note Selecting units does not convert values i a 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX P3402 P 3403 Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Source Value i0 QUTEYP nep FORM 3404 Value Display Range Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 0 T3 32768 32767 1 7 Defines the decimal point location l Signed e Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 31 9 point 2 3 14 e See table for example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 31 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 parameter listing in 6 314 Complete Parameter List for resolution which indicates the 7 3142 decimal point location and the units of measure a 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter O NOTSEL 9 C 18 MWh 27 ft 36 l s 45 Pa 54 Ib m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 lb ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 min 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 mA 20 m3 h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 12 mV 21 lt dm s 30 FPM 39 m s 48 gallm 57 ft s 66 m min 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 m3
332. tures and or fine tuning 1 Review the parameter descriptions in Complete Parameter Descriptions starting on page 65 Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system 2 Edit parameters as appropriate Fault and Alarm Adjustments The ACS550 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems For example initial system operation may generate faults or alarms that indicate set up problems 1 Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number Note the number reported 2 Review the description provided for the reported fault alarm Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 202 and 208 respectively or page 210 for the Basic Control Panel s alarm listing or e Press the help key Assistant Control Panel only while fault or alarm is displayed 3 Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate Installation ACS550 User s Manual 27 Start Up Start up configures the drive This process sets parameters that define how the drive operates and communicates Depending on the control and communication requirements the start up process may require any or all of the following The Start up Assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel steps you through the default configuration The Start up Assistant runs automatically at the first power up or can be accessed at any time using the main menu Application macros can be selected to define common alternate system configurations
333. tworks lugs for RE terminal size Cel ACS550 User s Manual installation check list 0c eee eee 23 compatibility 9 environment 10 flow chart 7 location sr ee a th above e a 10 mounting drive 12 preparation 8 procedures 7 AAP 9 wiring overview 13 insulation CHECK ects ot Macs dete Ore ba NADA ete a DO 18 integration time PID parameter 122 integration time parameter 97 interlocks parametar iria ee eck edie ae ale 142 internal setpoint PID parameter 124 IR compensation frequency parameter 101 parameters ke eee eee tenei aje 101 voltage parameter 101 IT network see floating network K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 75 kWh counter data parameter 67 L label serial number anaana 8 type coder se eki zlet lake poe ce 8 language parameter 65 liability limits 247 limits parameter group 90 load package version parameter 111 LOC REM Assistant panel 29 Basic panel 000 ee eee eee 38 local Control sank vice te tet uj 29 local m
334. ual value of the drive s cooling fan counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter 0 0 NOT SEL REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 to it 2905 RUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter 0 0 NOT SEL 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it 2907 2908 USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter 0 0 lt NOT SEL USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter The parameter is reset by writing 0 0 to it Start Up 104 ACS550 User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain e 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits O NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 All LOSS or 8 Al2 LOSS and the drive co
335. urce for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source gt 2 Al2 Defines analog input 2 A12 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX e The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum 2V 4 mA reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum 0V 0mA using parameter 1104 e The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 e Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST Warning Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a 0 V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA e Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher e Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 Al2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX 4 EXT REF 1 MIN Hysteresis 4 of Full Scale
336. ure fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For Frame Size e R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift e R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 3 Remove the fan e R5 Swing the fan out on its hinges Bottom View R6 RE Pull the fan out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power X0022 Maintenance 214 ACS550 User s Manual Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement IP 54 UL Type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4 2 Remove the front co
337. ve outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in Complete Parameter Descriptions Drive Parameter Protocol Reference 0102 SPEED 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLT 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the Actual Value Scaling in the following sections as appropriate e ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Fieldbus Adapter ACS550 User s Manual 189 Diagnostics FBA Fault Handling The ACS550 provides fault information as follows e The control panel display shows a fault code and text See Diagnostics starting on page 201 for a complete description e Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults e For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process
338. vels high noise levels generate errors BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors e CRC calculations for possible errors Start Up 134 ACS550 User s Manual Group 53 EFB Protocol This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus See Embedded Fieldbus starting on page 149 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol e Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link e The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication e The same sett
339. ver 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that Remove power from drive The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive The fan air flow is up refer to arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Capacitors Remove power from drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Restore power The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Maintenance ACS550 User s Manual 215 Control Panel Cleaning
340. w relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the soeed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on H Relay Logic ACS550 ACS550 1 ara ii i a a Hi II Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Start Up 140 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description e The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter Setting ACS550 Relay Assignment 1 Autochange Disabled 4 RO1 R
341. w the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors e The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 139 Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay Outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 e Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively ho
342. wed 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free D14 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 145 Code Description 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC e The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled R
343. x times its rated current e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class P 3006 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Vo Start Up ACS550 User s Manual 105 Code Description 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor When set to 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT e Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed e Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Output current relative 4 to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 P3007 100 4 ae P3008 50 Frequency P 3009 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values 600 s 1 0 4 eS gt 0 5 4 fo fBRk 0 r r r gt 0 02 04 06 08 10 1 2 Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3005 MOT THERM TIME 3006 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3007 lo Output current IN Nominal motor current Output frequency A lg l A 5A O N 3 0 60 s 251 90 s 2 0 fo 180 s fgak Break point frequency 1 5 ae sane A Trip time 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operate
344. xxx Register Mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded Fieldbus 166 ACS550 User s Manual The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus Register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile S CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 O or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREO Use select using 5310 param
345. ypical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that The ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F e The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pp If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Technical Data ACS550 User s Manual 219 Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required lt 15 4 A 0 80 lt 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see Switching Frequency Derating below Referring to lon in the ratings tables page 216 the following drives exceed the lon requirement of 19 25 A ACS550 x1 023A 4 or ACS550 x1 024A 2 Temperature Derating
346. ze dependent 2604 IR COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 1 1 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 sw FREQ CTRL O OFF 1 ON 1 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 Group 29 Maintenance Trig 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 NOT SEL 2902 GOOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev O NOT SEL 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 MRev 1 MRev 0 MRev 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh O NOT SEL 2906 RUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2907 USER MWH TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh O NOT SEL 2901 USER MWH ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Group 30 Fault Functions 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 0 6 1 6 1 0 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 0 6 1 6 1 0 3005 MOT THERM PROT O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 WARNING fi 1 FAULT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 500 s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 1 O NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20 s 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 WARNING O NOT SEL 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 10 400 s 1s 20 s 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 5 1 1 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENAB

ACS550-01/U1 Drive User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents